2014 Fiat Freemont Owner'

ENGLISH
The data contained in this publication is intended merely as a guide. FIAT reserves the right to modify the models and
versions described in this booklet at any time for technical and commercial reasons.
If you have any further questions please consult your FIAT dealer.
Printed in recycled paper without chlorine.
1500080_14_FIAT_Freemont_OM_cover.indd 1
F
I
A
O
W
F
T
N
E
R
R
E
H
A
E
N
M
D
B
O
O
O
N
T
K
8/27/13 3:02 PM
WHY CHOOSE
GENUINE PARTS
We really know your car because we invented, designed
and built it: we know every single detail. At
Fiat Service authorised workshops you can find
technicians who are trained by us, offering quality and
professionalism for all your service requirements.
Fiat workshops are always close to you for your
servicing operations, repairs and seasonal checks and
our experts will offer practical recommendations for
keeping your car in the best possible condition.
When you use Genuine Parts you keep the reliability,
comfort and performance features of your new car
over time.
Always ask for Genuine Parts and insist on them
being fitted to your car. We recommend them because
we know they are derived from our continued
commitment to research and development and our use
of highly innovative technologies.
For these reasons, you can rely on Genuine Parts
because they are the only ones designed specifically
for your car.
1500080_14_FIAT_Freemont_OM_cover.indd 2
8/27/13 3:02 PM
All our Genuine Parts undergo rigorous testing, both in design and build stages, by specialists who check the use of
cutting-edge materials and test their reliability.
This guarantees performance and safety in the long term for both you and the passengers in your automobile.
Always insist on a Genuine Part and check that it has been used.
Dear Customer,
Thank you for choosing Fiat and congratulations on your choice of a Fiat Freemont.
We have written this handbook to help you get to know all your car and use it in the best possible way.
You should read it right through before taking to the road for the first time.
You will find information, tips and important warnings regarding the driving of your car to help you get the most from the
technological features of your Fiat.
Carefully read the warnings and indications marked with the following symbols:
personal safety;
car safety;
environmental protection.
The enclosed Warranty Booklet lists the services that Fiat offers to its customers:
• the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity
• the range of additional services available to Fiat customers.
Enjoy the read. Happy motoring!
This Owner Handbook describes all versions of the Fiat Freemont; please consider only the information relevant
to your version, engine and configuration.
KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FIAT vehicle. Be
assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are
traditional to our vehicles.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read this Owner's
Manual and all the supplements. Be sure you are familiar
with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for
braking, steering, and transmission shifting. Learn how
your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your
driving skills will improve with experience, but as in
driving any vehicle, take it easy as you begin. Always
observe local laws wherever you drive.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information,
it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient
referencing and remain with the vehicle when
sold.
Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or a collision.
Operating this vehicle at excessive speeds or while
intoxicated may result in loss of control, collision with
other vehicles or objects, going off the road, or overturning; any of which may lead to serious injury or
death. Also, failure to use seat belts subjects the driver
and passengers to a greater risk of injury or death.
To keep your vehicle running at its best, have your
vehicle serviced at recommended intervals by an authorized dealer who has the qualified personnel, special
tools, and equipment to perform all service.
The manufacturer and its distributors are vitally interested in your complete satisfaction with this vehicle.
If you encounter a service or warranty problem, which
is not resolved to your satisfaction, discuss the matter
with your dealer's management.
Your authorized dealer will be happy to assist you with
any questions about your vehicle.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
1
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
2
IMPORTANT NOTICE
ALL MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS PUBLICATION IS BASED ON THE LATEST INFORMATION
AVAILABLE AT TIME OF PUBLICATION APPROVAL.
THE RIGHT IS RESERVED TO PUBLISH REVISIONS
AT ANY TIME.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of
your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty
Information Booklet and various customer-oriented
documents. You are urged to read these publications
carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this Owner's Manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
After you have read the Owner’s Manual, it should be
stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
The manufacturer reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or to make additions
to or improvements in its products without imposing
any obligations upon itself to install them on products
previously manufactured.
The Owner's Manual illustrates and describes the features that are standard or available as extra cost options. Therefore, some of the equipment and accessories in this publication may not appear on your vehicle.
NOTE: Be sure to read the Owner's Manual first before
driving your vehicle and before attaching or installing
parts/accessories or making other modifications to the
vehicle.
In view of the many replacement parts and accessories
from various manufacturers available on the market,
the manufacturer cannot be certain that the driving
safety of your vehicle will not be impaired by the
attachment or installation of such parts. Even if such
parts are officially-approved (for example, by a general
operating permit for the part or by constructing the
part in an officially approved design), or if an individual
operating permit was issued for the vehicle after the
attachment or installation of such parts, it cannot be
implicitly assumed that the driving safety of your vehicle is unimpaired. Therefore, neither experts nor
official agencies are liable. The manufacturer only assumes responsibility when parts, which are expressly
authorized or recommended by the manufacturer, are
attached or installed at an authorized dealer. The same
applies when modifications to the original condition
are subsequently made on the manufacturer's vehicles.
Your warranties do not cover any part that the manufacturer did not supply. Nor do they cover the cost of
any repairs or adjustments that might be caused or
needed because of the installation or use of nonmanufacturer parts, components, equipment, materials, or additives. Nor do your warranties cover the
costs of repairing damage or conditions caused by any
changes to your vehicle that do not comply with the
manufacturers specifications.
Original parts and accessories and other products
approved by the manufacturer, including qualified advice, are available at your authorized dealer.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factorytrained technicians and genuine parts, and is interested
in your satisfaction.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Copyright © FIAT Group Automobiles S.p.A.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
3
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which
section contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 1)
4
The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner's Manual: (fig. 1)
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/
ALTERATIONS
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this
vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision
resulting in serious injury or death.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
5
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
(fig. 2)
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
6
(fig. 2)
1 — Side Window Demist Outlet
2 — Air Outlet
3 — Instrument Cluster
4 — Uconnect® System
5 — Glove Compartment
6 — Switch Bank
7 — Uconnect® Hard Controls
8 — SD Memory Card Slot
9 — Power Outlet
10 — CD/DVD Slot
11 — Engine Start/Stop Button
12 — Hood Release Lever
13 — Dimmer Controls
14 — Headlight Switch
INSTRUMENTS
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
(fig. 3)
1. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area,
ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
2. Speedometer
Shows the vehicle speed.
SAFETY
3. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the tank when
ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 3)
7
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
4. Coolant Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge indicates engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a high temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
in heavy traffic, or when towing a trailer. If the pointer
rises to the “H” mark, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. If the Air Conditioning A/C system is on, turn
it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
idle the vehicle. If the needle remains on the “H” mark,
turn the engine OFF immediately and call for service.
Do not leave your vehicle unattended
with the engine running,as you would not
be able to react to the temperature indicator light if the engine overheats.
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature™
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-NGo™ feature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And Driving” for further information.
KEYLESS IGNITION NODE (KIN)
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are LOCK/OFF,
ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START.
During start RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change
with the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key
Fob) may have a low or dead battery. In this situation a
back up method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START/
STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch.
(fig. 4)
8
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores
in the rear of the Key Fob.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical
latch on the side of the Key Fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go
dead. The emergency key is also for locking the glove
box. You can keep the emergency key with you when
valet parking.
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency
key into the lock cylinders with either side up.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
(fig. 5)
SAFETY
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver's door when the ignition is in ACC
or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to
remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to
the chime, the ignition or accessory on message will
display in the cluster.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
(fig. 4)
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
1 — LOCK/OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
CONTENTS
(fig. 5)
Emergency Key Removal
9
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
10
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window switches, radio, power sunroof (for versions/
markets, where provided), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is
cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Knowing Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission
into PARK, and push ignition button to place
ignition in OFF position. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle
or in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the Key Fob from vehicle,
cycle the ignition OFF and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle
is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and a
RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb
check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an
invalid Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these
conditions will result in the engine being shut off after
two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as
soon as possible by an authorized dealer.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving
the vehicle unattended.
• With Keyless Enter-N-Go™, always remember
to place the ignition in the OFF position.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank
Key Fob is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer
system serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to
the authorized dealer.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
11
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
CUSTOMER KEY PROGRAMMING
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system will be used in
the following European countries, which apply Directive 1999/5/EC: Austria, Belgium, Czech Republic,
Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary,
Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Norway,
Poland, Portugal, Romania, Russian Federation, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Yugoslavia, and United
Kingdom.
Operation is subject to the following conditions:
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate from distances up to approximately
20 m using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter.
The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at
the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 8 km/h and above disables
the system from responding to all RKE transmitter
buttons for all RKE transmitters. (fig. 6)
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver's door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 6)
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
12
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Knowing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors
1st Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock
either the driver's door or all doors on the first press
of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Flash Lights With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE
transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned
off. To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE
transmitter. The time for this feature is programmable
on vehicles equipped through Uconnect®. To change
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Knowing Your Vehicle” for further information.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Knowing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
13
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
Batteries could contain dangerous materials. Please
dispose of them according to respect for environment and local laws.
• Used batteries are harmful to the environment. You
can dispose of them either in the correct containers
as specified by law or by taking them to a Dealership,
which will deal with their disposal.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the
back housing or the printed circuit board.
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace
the battery. When replacing the battery, match the
+ sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of
the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid
touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils
may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a
battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with
your other hand.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two
halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not
to damage the seal during removal. (fig. 7)
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 7)
Separating RKE Transmitter Case
14
GENERAL INFORMATION
Transmitter and receivers operate on a carrier frequency of 434 MHz as required by EEC regulations.
These devices must be certified to conform to specific
regulations in each individual country. Two sets of
regulations are involved: ETS (European Telecommunication Standard) 300–220, which most countries use,
and German BZT federal regulation 225Z125, which is
based on ETC 300–220 but has additional unique requirements. Other defined requirements are noted in
ANNEX VI of COMMISSION DIRECTIVE 95/56/EC.
Operation is subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life
of the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio
station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile
or CB radios.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The Vehicle Security Alarm (VSA) system monitors the
vehicle doors, hood, and liftgate for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation.
If something triggers the alarm, the system will sound
the horn intermittently, flash the headlights and taillights, and flash the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken
to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after 29 seconds, turn off all of the visual signals
after one minute, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm
will rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is "OFF".
(refer to "Starting Procedures" in "Starting And
Driving" for further information).
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
CONTENTS
15
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive
Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in
the same exterior zone (refer to "Keyless Enter-NGo™" in "Knowing Your Vehicle" for further information).
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door the alarm will sound.
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock
the doors.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any
of the following methods:
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a
valid key fob available in the same exterior zone
(refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go™" in "Knowing Your
Vehicle" for further information).
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position by pressing the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Start/Stop button (requires at least one valid Key Fob
in the vehicle).
NOTE:
CONTENTS
16
• The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the
vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
PREMIUM SECURITY SYSTEM
(for versions/markets, where
provided)
The Premium Security system monitors the doors,
hood latch, and trunk for unauthorized entry and the
ignition switch for unauthorized operation. The system
also includes a dual function intrusion sensor and
vehicle tilt sensor. The intrusion sensor monitors the
vehicle interior for motion. The vehicle tilt sensor
monitors the vehicle for any tilting actions (tow away,
tire removal, ferry transport, etc).
In the event that something triggers the security system, the headlights will turn on, the alarm will sound
and the turn signal and side repeater lights will flash for
29 seconds, and then the lights will continue to flash for
an additional 5 seconds. The system will repeat this
sequence for up to 8 security violations in any mode
(door ajar, motion, hood ajar, etc.) before having to
rearm the system. At the end of any particular trigger
event, the lights will continue to flash for 26 seconds.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the theft alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is "OFF".
(refer to "Starting Procedures" in "Starting And
Driving" for further information).
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive
Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go™"
in "Knowing Your Vehicle" for further information).
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
3. If any doors are open, close them.
NOTE:
SERVICING
AND CARE
• Once the security system is armed, it remains in that
state until you disarm it by following either of the
disarming procedures described. If a power loss occurs
after arming the system, you must disarm the system
after restoring power to prevent alarm activation.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
17
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
18
• The ultrasonic intrusion sensor (motion detector)
actively monitors your vehicle every time you arm
the security system. If you prefer, you can turn OFF
the ultrasonic intrusion sensor and vehicle tilt sensor
when arming the security system. To do so, press the
LOCK button on the RKE transmitter three times
within 5 seconds of arming the system (while the
Vehicle Security Light is flashing rapidly).
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any
of the following methods:
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a
valid key fob available in the same exterior zone
(refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go™" in "Knowing Your
Vehicle" for further information).
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position by pressing the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Start/Stop button (requires at least one valid Key Fob
in the vehicle).
NOTE:
• The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk button
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock
the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the
vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the
manual door lock plunger.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK
(for versions/markets, where
provided)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive electronic
steering wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the
vehicle without the ignition key. If the steering wheel is
moved to one of the lock positions with the key in the
off positions, the steering wheel will lock.
TO MANUALLY LOCK THE STEERING
WHEEL
With the engine running, rotate the steering wheel
one-half revolution in either direction (three o’clock or
nine o’clock position), turn off the engine and remove
the key. Turn the steering wheel slightly in either
direction until the lock engages.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE
INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. (fig. 8)
This system allows the driver to select a variety of
useful information by pressing the switches mounted
on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
• Radio Info
• Fuel Economy
• Vehicle Speed
• Trip Info
TO RELEASE THE STEERING WHEEL LOCK
Cycle the ignition and start the engine.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right
to disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to
engage the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to
disengage it.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 8)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
19
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
• Tire Pressure
• Vehicle Information
• Warning Message Displays
• Turn Menu OFF
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel: (fig. 9)
• UP Button
Press and release the UP button to scroll upward through the main menus (Fuel Economy,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units)
and sub-menus.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
• DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to
scroll downward through the main menus
and sub-menus.
• SELECT Button
Press and release the SELECT button for
access to main menus or sub-menus. Press
and hold the SELECT button for two seconds
to reset features.
• BACK Button
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
previous menu.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) DISPLAYS
The EVIC display consists of three sections:
SERVICING
AND CARE
1. The top line where compass direction, odometer
line and outside temperature are displayed.
2. The main display area where the menus and pop up
messages are displayed.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the
odometer line.
CONTENTS
(fig. 9)
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
20
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays "pop up"
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible
warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most
of the messages of this type are then stored (as long as
the condition that activated it remains active) and can
be reviewed from the "Messages" main menu item. As
long as there is a stored message, an "i" will be displayed
in the EVIC's compass/outside temp line. Examples of
this message type are "Right Front Turn Signal Lamp
Out" and "Low Tire Pressure".
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
Examples of this message type are "Memory System
Unavailable - Not in Park" and "Automatic High Beams
On".
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays the following messages:
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if
the vehicle is driven more than 1.6 km with either
turn signal on)
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples of this message type are "Turn Signal On" (if a
turn signal is left on) and "Lights On" (if driver leaves
the vehicle).
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the
RUN state. Example of this message type is "Press
Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start".
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in
PARK (for versions/markets, where provided)
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
21
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
22
• Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more doors
open, with a single chime if speed is above 1.6 km/h)
• Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more doors open,
with a single chime if speed is above 1.6 km/h)
• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
• Liftgate Ajar (with a single chime)
• Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
• Ignition or Accessory On
• Vehicle Not in Park (for versions/markets, where
provided)
• Key Left Vehicle
• Key Not Detected
• Low Tire Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Monitor” in “Knowing Your Vehicle”.
• Inflate Tire to XXX. Refer to information on "Tire
Pressure" and "Tire Pressure Monitor" in "Knowing
Your Vehicle."
• Service TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure Monitor” in “Knowing
Your Vehicle”.
• Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
• Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Knowing
Your Vehicle”)
• Oil Change Due (with a single chime)
• Exhaust System — Regeneration Required Now.
Under conditions of exclusive short duration and
low speed driving and low speed driving cycles, the
engine and exhaust after-treatment system may
never reach the conditions required to remove the
trapped PM. If this occurs the “Exhaust System Regeneration Required Now” message will be displayed
on the EVIC. By driving your vehicle at highway
speeds for as little as 30 minutes, you can remedy the
condition in the particulate filter system by allowing
the trapped PM to be removed to restore the system
to normal operating condition.
• Exhaust Service Required — See Dealer Now. The
engine will be de-rated to prevent permanent damage to the after-treatment system. If this condition
occurs, it is necessary to have your vehicle serviced
by your local authorized dealer.
EVIC WHITE TELLTALE LIGHTS
This area will show reconfigurable white caution telltales. These telltales include:
EVIC AMBER TELLTALE LIGHTS
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution telltales. These telltales include:
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
• Shift Lever Status — Automatic Transmission
Only
The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,6,5,4,3,2,1” are displayed
indicating the shift lever position. Telltales “6, 5,4,3,2,1”
indicate the Autostick™ feature has been engaged and
the gear selected is displayed. For further information on
Autostick™, refer to “Starting And Driving.”
• Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
11.0 L this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
SAFETY
• Electronic Speed Control ON
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in
“Knowing Your Vehicle.”
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in
“Knowing Your Vehicle.”
• Loose Gascap Indicator (for versions/markets,
where provided)
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator will display in the telltale display area.
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the problem
continues, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
SERVICING
AND CARE
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
23
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
24
EVIC RED TELLTALE LIGHTS
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
telltales include:
• Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and
shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will
sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical
charging system. The light should come on when
the ignition is first cycled ON and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “In An Emergency”.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
The light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position (for versions/markets,
where provided). The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light
is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required. You may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing.
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge
to pass H, a continuous chime will occur until the
engine is allowed to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off.
Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the
vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If
this light turns on, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light
turns off.
Continuous driving with theTransmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated
will eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle
when the Transmission Temperature
Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the
fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine
or exhaust components and cause a fire.
Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — for
versions/markets, where provided
The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) system is enabled on
vehicles with a manual transmission, or when a vehicle
with an automatic transmission is in manual shift mode.
The GSI provides the driver with a visual indication
within the EVIC when the recommended gear shift point
has been reached. This indication notifies the driver that
changing gear will allow a reduction in fuel consumption.
When the shift up indicator (+) is shown on the display,
the GSI is advising the driver to engage a higher gear.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
(fig. 10) (fig. 11)
SERVICING
AND CARE
When the shift down indicator (-) is shown on the
display, the GSI is advising the driver to engage a lower
gear. (fig. 12) (fig. 13)
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
The GSI indicator in the EVIC remains illuminated until
the driver changes gear, or the driving conditions return to a situation where changing gear is not required
to improve fuel consumption.
CONTENTS
25
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
(fig. 10)
GSI Shift Up (+) Indicator — Automatic Transmission
(fig. 12)
GSI Shift Down (-) Indicator — Automatic Transmission
(fig. 11)
GSI Shift Up (+) Indicator — Manual Transmission
(fig. 13)
GSI Shift Down (-) Indicator — Manual Transmission
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
26
OIL CHANGE DUE
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
To turn off the message temporarily, press and release
the BACK button. To reset the oil change indicator
system please refer to a Fiat Dealership.
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging
will continue from the last fuel average reading before
the reset. (fig. 14)
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance
is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy, according to the
current fuel tank level. DTE cannot be reset through
the SELECT button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
FUEL ECONOMY
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel
Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press
the SELECT button. The following Fuel Economy functions will display in the EVIC:
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
• Average Fuel Economy
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
• Instantaneous Fuel Economy
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
CONTENTS
(fig. 14)
Fuel Economy Display
27
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
When the DTE value is less than 48 km estimated
driving distance, the DTE display will change to a
“LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue until
the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount
of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW FUEL”
message and a new DTE value will display.
VEHICLE SPEED
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until
“Vehicle Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Press
the SELECT button to display the current speed
in km/h. Pressing the SELECT button a second time will
toggle the unit of measure between km/h.
L/100km
This display shows the instantaneous L/100km in bar
graph form while driving. This will monitor the gas
mileage in real-time as you drive and can be used to
modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle
Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
EVIC.
(fig. 15)
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
TRIP INFO
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Trip
Info” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
SELECT button. Pressing the SELECT button with
"Trip Info" highlighted will cause the EVIC display to
show Trip A, Trip B, and Elapsed Time all in one display.
If you want to reset one of the three functions you use
the UP or DOWN buttons to highlight (select) the
feature that you want to reset. Pressing the SELECT
button will cause the selected feature to reset individually. The three features can only be reset individually.
The following Trip functions display in the EVIC:
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
CONTENTS
(fig. 15)
L/100km Bar Graph
28
The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the
last reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the
last reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last
reset. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is
being displayed. Press and release the SELECT button
once to clear the resettable function.
TIRE BAR/PSI
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tire
BAR/PSI” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Press the
SELECT button to view a graphic of the vehicle with a
tire pressure value at each corner of the graphic.
VEHICLE INFO (CUSTOMER
INFORMATION FEATURES)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until
“Vehicle Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button. Press the UP and DOWN button to
scroll through the available information displays that
may be equipped.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
• Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
• Oil Temperature — for versions/markets, where
provided
Displays the actual oil temperature.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
• Oil Pressure — for versions/markets, where
provided
Displays the actual oil pressure.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
• Trans Temperature
Displays the actual transmission sump temperature.
• Engine Hours
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
29
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
30
MESSAGES
In the Main Menu, press and release the UP or DOWN
button until “Messages: XX” displays highlighted in the
EVIC. If there is more than one message, pressing the
SELECT button will display a stored warning message.
Press and release the UP and DOWN buttons if there
is more than one message to step through the remaining stored messages. If there are no message, pressing
the SELECT button will do nothing.
TURN MENU OFF
Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button.
Pressing the SELECT button blanks the menu display.
Pressing any one of the four steering wheel buttons
brings the menu back.
Uconnect® SETTINGS
HARD-KEYS
Hard-Keys are located on the left and right side of the
Uconnect® 4.3 screen. In addition, there is a Scroll/
Enter control knob located on the right side of the
Climate Controls in the center of the instrument
panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus
and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of
the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
SOFT-KEYS
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect® touchscreen.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES —
Uconnect® 4.3 SETTINGS
In this mode the Uconnect® system allows you to
access programmable features that may be equipped
such as Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors
& Locks, Heated Seats (for versions/markets, where
provided), Engine Off Operation, Compass Settings,
Audio and Phone/Bluetooth settings through hard-keys
and soft-keys.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at
a time.
Press the "Settings" hard-key to access the Settings
screen, use the Page Up/Down soft-keys to scroll
through the following settings. Touch the desired setting soft key to change the setting using the description
shown on the following pages for each setting, (fig. 16)
(fig. 17)
Display
• Brightness
Press the Brightness soft-key to change this display.
When in this display you may select display brightness
with the headlights on and the headlights off. Adjust the
brightness with the + and – setting soft-keys or by
selecting any point on the scale in between the + and –
soft-keys followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
• Mode (for versions/markets, where provided)
Press the Mode soft-key to change this display. When in
this display you may select one of the auto display
settings. To change Mode status press and release the
Day, Night or Auto soft-key followed by pressing the
arrow back soft-key.
• Language
Press the Language soft-key to change this display.
When in this display you may select a different language
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions
and the navigation system (for versions/markets, where
provided). Press the German, French, Spanish, Italian,
Dutch or English button to select the language preferred followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 16)
(fig. 17)
1 — Uconnect® 4.3 Settings Hard-Key
Uconnect® 4.3 Soft-Keys
31
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
32
Then, as you continue, the information will display in
the selected language.
• Units
Press the Units soft-key to change this display. When in
this display you may select to have the EVIC, odometer,
and navigation system (for versions/markets, where
provided) changed between US and Metric units of
measure. Press US or Metric followed by pressing the
arrow back soft-key. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected units of measure.
• Voice Response (for versions/markets, where
provided)
Press the Voice Response soft-key to change this display. When in this display you may change the Voice
Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length press and release the Brief or Long
soft-key followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
• Touch Screen Beep
Press the Touch Screen Beep soft-key to change this
display. When in this display you may turn on or shut off
the sound heard when a touch screen button (soft-key)
is pressed. To change the Touch Screen Beep setting
press and release the On or Off soft-key followed by
pressing the arrow back soft-key.
Clock
• Set Time
Press the Set Time soft-key to change this display.
When in this display you may select the time display
settings. To make your selection, press the Set Time
soft-key, adjust the hours and minutes using the up and
down soft-keys, select AM or PM, select 12 hr or 24 hr
followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key when all
selections are complete.
• Show Time Status (for versions/markets, where
provided)
Press the Show Time Status soft-key to change this
display. When in this display you may turn on or shut off
the digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show
Time Status setting press and release the On or Off
soft-key followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
• Sync Time (for versions/markets, where provided)
Press the Sync Time soft-key to change this display.
When in this display you may automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting
press and release the On or Off soft-key followed by
pressing the arrow back soft-key.
Safety / Assistance
• Park Assist (for versions/markets, where provided)
Press the Park Assist soft-key to change this display.
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects
behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is
in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 km/h.
The system can be enabled with Sound Only, Sound
and Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park Assist
status press and release the Off, Sound Only or Sounds
and Display button followed by pressing the arrow back
soft-key.
• Hill Start Assist (for versions/markets, where
provided)
Press the Hill Start Assist soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) system is active. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control System” in “Starting And Driving” for
system function and operating information. To make
your selection, press the Hill Start Assist soft-key,
select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back
soft-key.
Lights
• Headlight Off Delay
Press the Headlight Off Delay soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the driver can
choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60,
or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the
Headlight Off Delay status press the 0, 30, 60 or 90
soft-key followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
• Illuminated Approach (for versions/markets,
where provided)
Press the Illuminated Approach soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the headlights
will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status press
the 0, 30, 60 or 90 soft-key followed by pressing the
arrow back soft-key.
• Headlights with Wipers (for versions/markets,
where provided)
Press the Headlights with Wipers soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, and the
headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the
wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on
by this feature. To make your selection, press the
Headlights with Wipers soft-key, select On or Off
followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
33
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
34
• Auto High Beams “SmartBeam™” (for versions/
markets, where provided)
Press the Auto High Beams soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the high beam
headlights will deactivate automatically under certain
conditions. To make your selection, press the Auto
High Beams soft-key, select ON or OFF followed by
pressing the arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Lights/
SmartBeam™ (for versions/markets, where provided)”
in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Flash Headlights with Lock (for versions/
markets, where provided)
Press the Flash Headlights with Lock soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the front and
rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your
selection, press the Flash Headlights with Lock softkey, select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow
back soft-key.
Doors & Locks
• Auto Unlock on Exit (for versions/markets,
where provided)
Press the Auto Unlock on Exit soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, all doors will
unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the
driver's door is opened. To make your selection, press
the Auto Unlock on Exit soft-key, select On or Off
followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
• Flash Lights with Lock (for versions/markets,
where provided)
Press the Flash Lights with Lock soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the front and
rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your
selection, press the Flash Lights with Lock soft-key,
select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back
soft-key.
• Remote Door Unlock Order (for versions/
markets, where provided)
Press the Remote Door Unlock Order soft-key to
change this display. When Unlock Driver Door Only
On 1st Press is selected, only the driver's door will
unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK
button twice to unlock the passenger's doors. When
UnlockAll Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of the
doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go™ (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed
to Unlock All Doors 1st Press, all doors will unlock no
matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
grasped. If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed, only
the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
grasped. With Passive Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is
programmed touching the handle more than once will
only result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door
first is selected, once the driver door is opened, the
interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock
all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
Engine Off Options
• Passive Entry (Keyless Enter-N-Go™)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Press the Passive Entry soft-key to change this display.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter
lock or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press
the Passive Entry soft-key, select ON or OFF followed
by pressing the arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Keyless
Enter-N-Go™” in “Knowing Your Vehicle”.
• Engine Off Power Delay (for versions/markets,
where provided)
Press the Engine Off Power Delay soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the power
window switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (for
versions/markets, where provided), DVD video system
(for versions/markets, where provided), power sunroof
(for versions/markets, where provided), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front vehicle
door will cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off
Power Delay status press the 0 seconds, 45 seconds, 5
minutes or 10 minutes soft-key followed by pressing
the arrow back soft-key.
Heated Seats (for versions/markets, where
provided)
• Auto Heated Seats (for versions/markets, where
provided)
Press the Auto Heated Seats soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected the driver's
heated seat will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 44° C. To make your selection, press
the Auto Heated Seats soft-key, select On or Off
followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
• Headlight Off Delay
Press the Headlight Off Delay soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the driver can
choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60,
or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the
Headlight Off Delay status press the 0, 30, 60 or 90
soft-key followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
35
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Compass Settings
• Variance (for versions/markets, where provided)
Press the Variance soft-key to change this display.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone
where the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once
properly set, the compass will automatically compen-
sate for the differences, and provide the most accurate
compass heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top
of the instrument panel, such as iPod's, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference
with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
(fig. 18)
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 18)
Compass Variance Map
36
• Calibration (for versions/markets, where provided)
Press the Calibration key to change this setting. This
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need
to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key
and completing one or more 360–degree turns (in an
area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The
compass will now function normally.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface
and an environment free from large metallic objects
such as buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad
tracks, etc.
Audio
• Equalizer (for versions/markets, where provided)
Press the Equalizer soft-key to change this display.
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
in between the + and – soft-keys followed by pressing
the arrow back soft-key.
NOTE: Bass/mid/treble allow the you to simply slide
your finger up/down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
• Balance / Fade (for versions/markets, where
provided)
Press the Balance / Fade soft-key to change this display.
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
• Speed Adjusted Volume (for versions/markets,
where provided)
Press the Speed Adjusted Volume soft-key to change
this display. Decreases volume relative to vehicle
speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the
Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key followed by pressing the arrow
back soft-key.
• Surround Sound (for versions/markets, where
provided)
Press the Surround Sound soft-key to change this
display. Provides simulated surround sound mode. To
make your selection, press the Surround Sound softkey, select ON or OFF followed by pressing the arrow
back soft-key.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
Phone / Bluetooth®
• Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information,
refer to the Uconnect® Supplement.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
37
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
38
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES —
Uconnect® 8.4 SETTINGS
In this mode the Uconnect® system allows you to
access programmable features that may be equipped
such as Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors
& Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Operation,
Compass Settings, Audio and Phone/Bluetooth settings.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at
a time.
When making a selection, scroll up or down until the
preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release
the preferred setting until a check-mark appears next
to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Display
• Display Mode (for versions/markets, where
provided)
When in this display you may select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status press and
release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key followed by
pressing the arrow back soft-key.
• Display Brightness with Headlights ON
(for versions/markets, where provided)
When in this display you may select display brightness
with the headlights on and the headlights off. Adjust the
brightness with the + and – setting soft-keys or by
selecting any point on the scale in between the + and –
soft-keys followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
• Display Brightness with Headlights OFF
(for versions/markets, where provided)
When in this display you may select display brightness
with the headlights on and the headlights off. Adjust the
brightness with the + and – setting soft-keys or by
selecting any point on the scale in between the + and –
soft-keys followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
• Set Language (for versions/markets, where
provided)
When in this display you may select a different language
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions
and the navigation system (for versions/markets, where
provided). Press the German, French, Spanish, Italian,
Dutch or English button to select the language preferred followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
Then, as you continue, the information will display in
the selected language.
• Units (for versions/markets, where provided)
When in this display you may select to have the EVIC,
odometer, and navigation system (for versions/
markets, where provided) changed between US and
Metric units of measure. Press US or Metric followed
by pressing the arrow back soft-key. Then, as you
continue, the information will display in the selected
units of measure.
• Voice Response Length (for versions/markets,
where provided)
When in this display you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length press and release the Brief or Detailed soft-key
followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touch screen button (soft-key) is
pressed. To change the Touch Screen Beep setting
press and release the On or Off soft-key followed by
pressing the arrow back soft-key.
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn in Cluster
(for versions/markets, where provided)
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed
route. To make your selection, press the Navigation
Turn-By-Turn in Cluster soft-key, select On or Off
followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
Clock
• Sync Time with GPS (for versions/markets,
where provided)
When in this display you may automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting
press and release the On or Off soft-key followed by
pressing the arrow back soft-key.
• Set Time Hours
When in this display you may select the time display
settings. To make your selection, press the Set Time
soft-key, adjust the hours using the up and down
soft-keys, followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key
when all selections are complete.
• Set Time Minutes
When in this display you may select the time display
settings. To make your selection, press the Set Time
soft-key, adjust the minutes using the up and down
soft-keys, followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key
when all selections are complete.
• Time Format
When in this display you may select the time display
settings. To make your selection, press the Set Time
soft-key, select 12 hr or 24 hr followed by pressing the
arrow back soft-key when all selections are complete.
• Show Time in Status Bar (for versions/markets,
where provided)
When in this display you may turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press and release the On or Off soft-key
followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
39
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
40
Safety / Assistance
• Park Assist (for versions/markets, where provided)
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects
behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is
in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 km/h.
The system can be enabled with Sound Only, Sound
and Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park Assist
status press and release the Off, Sound Only or Sounds
and Display button followed by pressing the arrow back
soft-key.
• Parkview Backup Camera (for versions/markets,
where provided)
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
selection, press the Parkview Backup Camera check box
in the "Safety & Driving Assistance" menu to enable/
disable the Parkview Backup Camera.
• Hill Start Assist (for versions/markets, where
provided)
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control System” in “Starting And Driving” for system
function and operating information. To make your
selection, press the Hill Start Assist soft-key, select On
or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
Lights
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight
Off Delay status press the 0, 30, 60 or 90 soft-key
followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
• Headlight Illumination on Approach
(for versions/markets, where provided)
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when
the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To
change the Illuminated Approach status press the 0, 30,
60 or 90 soft-key followed by pressing the arrow back
soft-key.
• Headlights with Wipers (for versions/markets,
where provided)
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch
is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned
on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To
make your selection, press the Headlights with Wipers
soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the
arrow back soft-key.
• Auto Dim High Beams “SmartBeam™”
(for versions/markets, where provided)
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
To make your selection, press the Auto High Beams
soft-key, select ON or OFF followed by pressing the
arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™
(for versions/markets, where provided)” in “Knowing
Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Headlight Dipped Beam (Traffic Changeover)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Low beam headlights have more control of upward
light and direct most of their light downward and either
to the left for right hand drive countries or to the right
for left hand drive countries to provide safe forward
visibility without excessive glare.
• Flash Headlights With Lock (for versions/
markets, where provided)
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, press
the Flash Headlights with Lock soft-key, select On or Off
followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
Doors & Locks
• Auto Unlock on Exit (for versions/markets,
where provided)
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock
when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in
the PARK (for versions/markets, where provided) or
NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened. To
make your selection, press the Auto Unlock on Exit
soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the
arrow back soft-key.
• Flash Headlight with Lock (for versions/markets,
where provided)
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection,
press the Flash Lights with Lock soft-key, select On or
Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
41
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
42
• 1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks (for versions/
markets, where provided)
When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is
selected, only the driver's door will unlock on the first
press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. When
Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger's doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st
Press is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the
first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go™ (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed
to Unlock All Doors 1st Press, all doors will unlock no
matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
grasped. If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed, only
the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
grasped. With Passive Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is
programmed touching the handle more than once will
only result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door
first is selected, once the driver door is opened, the
interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock
all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
• Passive Entry (for versions/markets, where
provided)
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter
lock or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press
the Passive Entry soft-key, select ON or OFF followed
by pressing the arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Keyless
Enter-N-Go™” in “Knowing Your Vehicle”.
Engine Off Options
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (for versions/
markets, where provided), DVD video system (for
versions/markets, where provided), power sunroof (for
versions/markets, where provided), and power outlets
will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
is cycled OFF. Opening either front vehicle door will
cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off Power
Delay status press the 0 seconds, 45 seconds, 5 minutes
or 10 minutes soft-key followed by pressing the arrow
back soft-key.
• Headlight Off Delay (for versions/markets,
where provided)
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight
Off Delay status press the 0, 30, 60 or 90 soft-key
followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
Compass Settings
• Variance (for versions/markets, where provided)
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone
where the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once
properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate
compass heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top
of the instrument panel, such as iPod's, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference
with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
(fig. 19)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 19)
Compass Variance Map
43
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
44
• Perform Compass Calibration (for versions/
markets, where provided)
Press the Calibration key to change this setting. This
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need
to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key
and completing one or more 360–degree turns (in an
area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The
compass will now function normally.
Audio
• Balance/Fade (for versions/markets, where
provided)
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
• Equalizer (for versions/markets, where provided)
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
in between the + and – soft-keys followed by pressing
the arrow back soft-key.
NOTE: Bass/mid/treble allow the you to simply slide
your finger up/down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume (for versions/markets,
where provided)
Decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change
the Speed Adjusted Volume press the Off, 1, 2 or 3
soft-key followed by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
• Music Info Cleanup (for versions/markets, where
provided)
This feature helps organize music files for optimized
music navigation. To make your selection, press the
Music Info Cleanup soft-key, select On or Off followed
by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
Phone / Bluetooth®
• Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information,
refer to the Uconnect® Supplement.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch; the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
DRIVER'S POWER SEAT (for versions/
markets, where provided)
The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the
seat near the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up,
down, forward, rearward or to tilt the seat. (fig. 20)
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 20)
Power Seat Switch
45
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
POWER LUMBAR (for versions/markets,
where provided)
The Power Lumbar switch is located on the outboard
side of the driver's seat. Push the switch forward to
increase the lumbar support. Push the switch rearward
to decrease the lumbar support. Pushing upward or
downward on the switch will raise or lower the position of the support. (fig. 21)
HEATED SEATS (for versions/markets, where
provided)
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks. The heated seats are operated using the
Uconnect® System.
Do not place any article under a power
seat or impede its ability to move as it
may cause damage to the seat controls.
Seat travel may become limited if movement is
stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 21)
Power Lumbar Switch
46
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the seat
heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion.This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated
could cause serious burns due to the increased
surface temperature of the seat.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four
minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will drop
to the normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level
after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change from HI to
LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn
OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
For Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect® 8.4
And 8.4 Nav:
Touch the “Controls” soft-key located on the
Uconnect® display. (fig. 22)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
For Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect® 4.3:
Touch the CLIMATE hard-key (located on the left side
of the Uconnect® display) to enter the climate control
screen.
SERVICING
AND CARE
Touch the “Driver” or “Pass” seat soft-key
(located on the Uconnect® display) once to
select HI-level heating. Touch the soft-key a
second time to select LO-level heating. Touch the
soft-key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 22)
Controls Soft-Key
47
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
Touch the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat softkey once to select HI-level heating. Touch the
soft-key a second time to select LO-level
heating. Touch the soft-key a third time to
shut the heating elements OFF. (fig. 23)
MANUAL FRONT SEAT ADJUSTMENTS
For models equipped with manual seats, the driver and
passenger seats can be adjusted forward or rearward
by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion,
near the floor. (fig. 24)
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located and
move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar
once the desired position has been reached. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and rearward on
the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
(fig. 23)
(fig. 24)
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
Heated Seats Soft-Keys
48
Manual Seat Adjustment
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
RECLINER ADJUSTMENT
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the
seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the
lever, lean back to the desired position and release the
lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright
position, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever
once the seatback is in the upright position. (fig. 25)
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous.The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control.
The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and
you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while
the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 25)
Seatback Release
49
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
DRIVER'S SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
The seat height control lever is located on the outboard side of the seat. Raise the lever to raise the seat.
Lower the lever to lower the seat. The total seat travel
is approximately 55 mm. (fig. 26)
Pull upward on the recline lever to fold or unfold the
seat.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous.The sudden movement
of the seat could cause you to lose control.Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
FOLD-FLAT FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This feature allows for extended cargo space. When
the seat is folded flat, it is an extension of the load floor
surface (allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch
up to the instrument panel). The fold-flat seatback also
has a hardback surface that you can use as a work
surface when the seat is folded flat and the vehicle is
not in motion. (fig. 27)
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
injury by restricting head movement in the event of a
rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that
the top of the head restraint is located above the top of
your ear.
(fig. 26)
(fig. 27)
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
Seat Height Adjustment Lever
50
Fold-Flat Seat
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants
must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Active Head Restraints (AHR) — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment can not be
readily identified by any markings, only through visual
inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will
be split in two halves, with the front half being soft
foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the
gap between the back of the occupant’s head and the
AHR. This system is designed to help prevent or reduce
the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint. (fig. 28)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 28)
Push Button
51
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer
to the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of
the head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the
head restraint to move the head restraint away from
your head. (fig. 29) (fig. 30)
NOTE:
(fig. 29)
(fig. 30)
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
• The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If
either of the head restraints require removal, see
your authorized dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Supplemental
Active Head Restraints (AHR)/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Safety” for further information.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
52
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
WARNING!
• Do not place items over the top of the
Active Head Restraint, such as coats,
seat covers or portable DVD players.These items
may interfere with the operation of the Active
Head Restraint in the event of a collision and
could result in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they
are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or
loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of
the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is
secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active
Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to
follow this warning could cause personal injury if
the Active Head Restraint is deployed.
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified
technicians, for service purposes only. If any of the head
restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
• For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Safety”.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints
removed or improperly adjusted could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision. The head restraints should be checked
prior to operating the vehicle and never adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion.
(Continued)
Head Restraints — Second Row Seats
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the
adjustment button, located on the base of the head
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
(fig. 31)
CONTENTS
(fig. 31)
Adjustment Button
53
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
54
THIRD ROW PASSENGER SEATS
(Seven Passenger Models)
These head restraints are non-adjustable and nonremovable. However, you can fold them forward when
they are not in use by passengers.
WARNING!
Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third
row seat without having the head restraint unfolded and locked in place. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal injury
to the passenger in the event of a collision.
60/40 SPLIT SECOND-ROW PASSENGER
SEATS
To provide additional storage area, each second-row
passenger seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some seating
room if needed.
NOTE: Prior to folding the second-row passenger
seat, make sure the front seatback is not in a reclined
position. This will allow the second-row seat to fold
easily.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• On seven passenger models, do not allow a
passenger to sit in a third row seat with the
second row seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision,
the passenger could slide underneath the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.
To Fold The Seat
1. Locate the control lever on the lower outboard side
of the seat. (fig. 32)
2. Place one hand on the seatback and apply a gentle
pressure.
3. Lift the control lever with the other hand, allow the
seatback to move forward slightly, and then release
the lever.
WARNING!
To prevent personal injury or damage to
objects, keep your head, arms, and objects out of the folding path of the seatback.
4. Gently guide the seatback into the folded position.
To Unfold The Seat
Raise the seatback and lock it in place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is locked
securely into position. Otherwise, the
seat will not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat.
Lift the lever to move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the lever once the seat is in the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched. (fig. 33)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 32)
(fig. 33)
Seatback Release
Manual Seat Adjustment
55
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous.The sudden movement
of the seat could cause you to lose control. The
seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you
could be injured. Adjust any seat only while the
vehicle is parked.
Recliner Adjustment
The recline lever is on the outboard side of the seat. To
recline the seatback, lean back, lift the lever, position the
seatback as desired, and then release the lever. To return
the seatback to its normal upright position, lean back, lift
the lever, lean forward, and then release the lever once
the seatback is in the upright position. (fig. 34)
SERVICING
AND CARE
Seatback/Armrest — Second Row Passenger
Seat
The latch release-loop is located at the top of the
seatback/armrest. Pull the release-loop forward to release the latch and then downward to lower the
seatback/armrest. (fig. 35)
Raise the seatback/armrest and lock it in place when
not in use, or when additional seating area is required.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 34)
Recline Lever
56
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous.The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control.
The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and
you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while
the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
WARNING!
Keep the latch clean and free of objects
and be certain that the seatback/
armrest is locked securely into position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Stadium Tip 'n Slide™ (Easy Entry/Exit Seat) —
Seven Passenger Models
This feature allows passengers to easily enter or exit
the third-row passenger seats from either side of the
vehicle.
To Move The Second-Row Passenger Seat
Forward
NOTE: Raise the seatback/armrest before moving the
seat to allow for full seat travel.
Move the control lever on the upper outboard side of
the seatback forward. Then, in one fluid motion, the
seat cushion flips upward and the seat moves forward
on its tracks. (fig. 36) (fig. 37)
NOTE: A hand-grip is molded into the front of each
quarter trim panel near the door opening to assist
entry and exit from the third-row passenger seats.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 35)
(fig. 36)
Seatback/Armrest
Tip 'n Slide™ Control Lever
57
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in
this position, as it is only intended for
entering and exiting the third row seats. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal injury.
To Unfold And Move The Second-Row
Passenger Seat Rearward
Move the seatback rearward until it locks in place and
then continue sliding the seat rearward on its tracks
until it locks in place.
Push the seat cushion downward to lock it in place.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback and seat
are locked securely into position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
50/50 SPLIT THIRD-ROW PASSENGER
SEATS WITH FOLD-FLAT FEATURE
(Seven Passenger Models)
To provide additional storage area, each third-row
passenger seatback can be folded flat. This allows for
extended cargo space and still maintains some rear
seating room if needed.
NOTE: Prior to folding the third-row passenger seatback, make sure the second-row passenger seatback is
not in a reclined position. This will allow the seatback
to fold easily.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 37)
Tip 'n Slide™ Seat
58
Adjust the seat track position as desired. Using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
To Fold The Seatback
Pull the latch release-loop located at the top of the
seatback upward, push the seatback forward slightly,
and release the release-loop. Then, continue to push
the seatback forward. The head restraints will fold
automatically as the seatback moves forward. (fig. 38)
To Unfold The Seatback
Grasp the assist strap loop on the seatback and pull it
toward you to raise the seatback. Continue to raise the
seatback until it locks in place. Raise the head restraint
to lock it in place. (fig. 39)
The seatback can also be locked in the reclined position. To do so, pull the latch release-loop located at the
top of the seatback upward, allow the seatback to
recline, and release the release-loop.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 38)
(fig. 39)
Seatback Release
Assist Strap
59
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is locked
securely into position. Otherwise, the
seat will not provide the proper stability for
passengers. An improperly latched seat could
cause serious injury.
• Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row
seat without having the head restraint unfolded
and locked in place. Failure to follow this warning
may result in personal injury to the passenger in
the event of a collision.
• Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row
seat with the second row seatback(s) folded flat.
In a collision, the passenger could slide underneath the seat belt and be seriously or even
fatally injured.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the
end of the steering column. (fig. 40)
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen
or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, pull the control handle
upward until fully engaged.
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 40)
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Handle
60
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column
while driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of
the vehicle. Be sure the steering column is locked
before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL
(for versions/markets, where
provided)
The steering wheel contains a heating element that
helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated
steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once
the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will
operate for approximately 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut
off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is
already warm.
The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect® System.
Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the “Heated
Steering Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated steering wheel. Press the “Heated Steering Wheel” soft-key
a second time to turn the heated steering wheel off.
(fig. 41) (fig. 42)
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
61
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the seat
heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion.This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated
could cause serious burns due to the increased
surface temperature of the seat.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
(fig. 41)
Controls Soft-Key
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 42)
Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key
62
MIRRORS
INSIDE DAY/NIGHT MIRROR
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control lever under the mirror to the night position
(lever flipped toward the rear of vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield). (fig. 43)
AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRROR
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted
on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in
reverse. (fig. 44)
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the
solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror
clean.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 43)
(fig. 44)
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror
63
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a
slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside
mirror.
Models Without Express Window Feature
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
Models With Express Window Feature
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the
passenger side convex mirror will look
smaller and farther away than they really are.
Relying too much on your passenger side convex
mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side convex mirror. Failure
to follow this warning may result in serious injury
or death.
Press the mirror select button marked L (left) or
R (right) and then press one of the four arrow buttons
to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is
pointing.
Press and release the mirror select button marked
L (left) or R (right) and then press one of the four arrow
buttons to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is
pointing. The selection times out after 30 seconds of
inactivity in order to guard against accidentally changing
a mirror position following an adjustment.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror switch is located on the driver's
door trim panel. (fig. 45)
CONTENTS
(fig. 45)
Power Mirror Switches
64
POWER FOLDING MIRRORS (for
versions/markets, where provided)
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
to the normal driving position.
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 16 km/h the
folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
speed is equal or greater than 8 km/h, they will automatically unfold.
MANUAL FOLDING MIRRORS
Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged.
The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and
rearward to resist damage. The hinge has three detent
positions: forward, rearward and normal.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
(for versions/markets, where provided)
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light. (fig. 46)
Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror
to extend it.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
HEATED MIRRORS (for versions/markets,
where provided)
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
This feature is activated whenever you turn on
the rear window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window
Features” for further information.
CONTENTS
(fig. 46)
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
65
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the instrument
panel or through the Uconnect® system display.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes
(Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and
passenger temperature settings will be indicated at the
top of the display.
Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Hard-Keys
Hard-keys are located on the left and right side of the
Uconnect® 4.3 screen in the center of the instrument
panel. There are also hard-keys located below the
Uconnect® touch screen. (fig. 47) (fig. 48)
(fig. 47)
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system
screen. (fig. 49) (fig. 50)
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 48)
Manual Temperature Controls — Hard-Keys
66
Button Descriptions
(Applies To Both Hard-keys And Soft-keys)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C
indicator will turn off.
(fig. 49)
Uconnect® 4.3 Manual 3 — Zone Temperature
Controls — Soft-keys
(fig. 50)
Uconnect® 8.4 Manual 3 — Zone Temperature
Controls — Soft-keys
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting
to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this
feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch
into manual mode. If the front defrost mode is turned
off the climate system will return the previous setting.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
67
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
68
5. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (for
versions/markets, where provided). An indicator will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after
10 minutes.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for warmer temperature
settings.
Failure to follow these cautions can
cause damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of
the rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution,
wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels
can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of
the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
6. Rear Climate Button (for versions/markets,
where provided)
Press and release this button to turn on the rear
climate controls. The indicator will illuminate when the
rear climate controls are ON. Performing this function
again will turn OFF the rear climate controls.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
9. SYNC
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature
On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated when this
feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the
passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
10. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will
cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
The speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or
soft-keys as follows:
Hard-key
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort
conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
SAFETY
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower
setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the
blower bar area between the icons.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings
are as follows:
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window demist outlets. This mode works best in
cold or snowy conditions.
Soft-key
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up
and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to
shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate
Control ON/OFF.
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the
same time.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
69
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
70
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the
same time.
15. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 4.3 Only)
Press the driver or passenger temperature soft-key to
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Moving the temperature bar into
the red area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving
the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler
temperatures. Driver and passenger have independent
temperature control if Sync mode is not illuminated.
CLIMATE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned
on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets
into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the
A/C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also,
make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor
modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off,
but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent
fogging of the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation
of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from the front of the radiator and through the
condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when MAX A/C
is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can
be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other
settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to
the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Rear Manual Temperature Control
(MTC) (for versions/markets,
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or where provided)
Recirculation Control
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button.
The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this
button is selected. Push the button a second time to
turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air
into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode
may lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature may be unavailable (soft button greyed
out). The Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost
mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is
selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
The rear MTC system has floor air outlets at the rear
right side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at
each outboard rear seating position. The system provides heated air through the floor outlets or cool,
dehumidified air through the headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control soft-keys are
located in the Uconnect® touch system, located on
the instrument panel. (fig. 51) (fig. 52)
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From
The Front Uconnect® Touch-Screen
The Three-Zone climate control system allows for
adjustment of the rear climate controls from the front
ATC panel.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
71
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
To change the rear system settings:
the rear display. The rear temperature and air source
are controlled from the front Uconnect® system.
• Press "REAR" button to change control to rear
control mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Control functions now operate rear system.
• Rear occupants can only adjust the rear control when
the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned off.
• To return to Front screen, press "REAR" button again,
or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.
• The rear MTC is located in the headliner, near the
center of the vehicle.
Rear Lock
• Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock soft-key on the
Uconnect® touch-screen, illuminates a lock symbol in
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
72
(fig. 52)
Uconnect® 8.4 Manual Rear Climate Soft-Key
Controls Screen
(fig. 51)
Uconnect® 4.3 Manual Rear Climate Soft-Key
Controls Screen
1 — Blower Up Soft-Key
5 — Done Soft-Key
2 — Mode Soft-Key
6 — Rear Lock Soft-Key
3 — Temperature Soft-Key 7 — Rear Off Soft-Key
4 — Blower Down Soft-Key
1 — Rear Lock Soft-Key
2 — Front Climate Control
Soft-Key
3 — Temperature Up
Soft-Key
4 — Temperature Down
Soft-Key
5 — Blower Up Soft-Key
6 — Mode Soft-Key
7 — Blower Down
Soft-Key
8 — Rear Off Soft-Key
Rear Lock
• Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock soft-key on the
Uconnect® touch-screen, illuminates a lock symbol in
the rear display. The rear temperature and air source
are controlled from the front Uconnect® system.
• Rear occupants can only adjust the rear control when
the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned off.
• The rear MTC is located in the headliner, near the
center of the vehicle. (fig. 53)
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to
off, or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob
from low to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to
control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the
vehicle.
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic
Temperature Control System through an
intake grille, located in the right side trim
panel.The rear outlets are located in the right side
trim panel. Do not block or place objects directly
in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets. The
electrical system could overload causing damage
to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to
lower the temperature, and clockwise to increase the
temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the Uconnect® system.
(fig. 53)
Rear ATC Control Features
1 - Blower Speed
2 - Rear Temperature
3 - Rear MODE
4 - Rear Temperature Lock
When rear controls are locked by the Uconnect®
system , the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the
temperature knob is illuminated and any rear overhead
adjustments are ignored.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
73
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) With Touchscreen (for
• Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. versions/markets, where provided)
Rear Mode Control
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted
to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the
outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and
the floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the
headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Hard-Keys
Hard-keys are located on the left and right side of the
Uconnect® 4.3 screen in the center of the instrument
panel. There are also hard-keys located below the
Uconnect® touch screen. (fig. 54) (fig. 55)
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system
screen. (fig. 56) (fig. 57)
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 54)
74
Button Descriptions
(Applies To Both Hard-keys And Soft-keys)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C
indicator will turn off.
(fig. 55)
Automatic Temperature Controls — Hard-Keys
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
(fig. 56)
Uconnect® 4.3 Automatic 3 — Zone Temperature
Controls — Soft-keys
(fig. 57)
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic 3 — Zone Temperature
Controls — Soft-keys
CONTENTS
75
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
76
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature
by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting
to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this
feature is ON. Performing this function will cause the
ATC to switch into manual mode. The blower speed
may increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the
front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will
return the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (for
versions/markets, where provided). An indicator will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after
10 minutes.
Failure to follow these cautions can
cause damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of
the rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution,
wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels
can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of
the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Rear Climate Button (for versions/markets,
where provided)
Press and release this button to turn on the rear
climate controls. The indicator will illuminate when the
rear climate controls are ON. Performing this function
again will turn OFF the rear climate controls.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for warmer temperature
settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
10. SYNC
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature
On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated when this
feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the
passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
11. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will
cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
The speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or
soft-keys as follows:
Hard-key
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise.
Soft-key
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower
setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the
blower bar area between the icons.
12. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings
are as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off
or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort
conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
77
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
15. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature
control. Push the button for warmer temperature
settings.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window demist outlets. This mode works best in
cold or snowy conditions.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the
same time.
• Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side
window defrosting and defogging. When the defrost
mode is selected, the blower level may will increase.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
13. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate
Control ON/OFF.
SERVICING
AND CARE
14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
78
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the
same time.
16. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 4.3 Only)
Press the temperature soft-key to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment.
Moving the temperature bar into the red area, indicates
warmer temperatures. Moving the temperature bar
into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures.
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned
on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets
into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the
A/C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also,
make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor
modes.
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation
of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to
the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when MAX A/C
is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can
be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other
settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to
the prior settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn
off.
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button.
The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this
button is selected. Push the button a second time to
turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air
into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode
may lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature may be unavailable (soft button greyed
out). The Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost
mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is
selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
79
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
80
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button (4) on
the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature hard or soft control buttons
(7, 8, 13, 14). Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it
is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings
for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically
adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to
provide comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings”
in this section of the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will
remain on low until the engine warms up. The blower
will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
The system allows for manual selection of blower
speed, air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate
at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected.
This allows the front occupants to control the volume
of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto
mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the
airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings.
A/C operation and Recirculation control can also be
manually selected in Manual operation.
Rear Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) (for versions/
markets, where provided)
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear
right side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at
each outboard rear seating position. The system provides heated air through the floor outlets or cool,
dehumidified air through the headliner outlets.
To change the rear system settings:
• Press "REAR" button to change control to rear
control mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Control functions now operate rear system.
• To return to Front screen, press "REAR" button
again, or it will revert to the Front screen after six
seconds.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
The rear system temperature control soft-keys are
located in the Uconnect® touch system, located on
the instrument panel. (fig. 58) (fig. 59)
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From
The Front ATC Panel
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of
the rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
(fig. 58)
Uconnect® 4.3 Automatic Rear Climate Soft-Key
Controls Screen
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
1 — Blower Up Soft-Key
3 — Temperature Soft-Key
5 — Done Soft-Key
7 — Rear Auto Soft-Key
CONTENTS
2 — Mode Soft-Key
4 — Blower Down Soft-Key
6 — Rear Lock Soft-Key
8 — Rear Off Soft-Key
81
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Rear Lock
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock soft-key on the
Uconnect® touch-screen, illuminates a lock symbol in
the rear display. The rear temperature and air source
are controlled from the front Uconnect® system.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear
ATC control when the Rear Temperature Lock button
is turned off.
The rear ATC is located in the headliner, near the
center of the vehicle. (fig. 60)
• Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
Uconnect® touch-screen. This turns off the Rear
Temperature Lock icon in the rear temperature knob.
• Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
• ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
82
(fig. 59)
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Rear Climate Soft-Key
Controls Screen
1 — Rear Auto Soft-Key
3 — Front Climate Soft-Key
5— Temperature Down
Soft-Key
7 — Mode Soft-Key
9 — Rear Off Soft-Key
2 — Rear Lock Soft-Key
4 — Temperature Up
Soft-Key
6 — Blower Up Soft-Key
8 — Blower Down Soft-Key
(fig. 60)
Rear ATC Control Features
1 - Blower Speed
2 - Rear Temperature
3 - Rear MODE
4 - Rear Temperature Lock
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your
comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to
lower the temperature, and clockwise to increase the
temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the Uconnect® system.
NOTE: It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and fan speed to
provide comfort as quickly as possible.
When rear controls are locked by the Uconnect®
system, the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the
temperature knob is illuminated and any rear overhead
adjustments are ignored.
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to
off, or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob
from low to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to
control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the
vehicle.
Rear Mode Control
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic
Temperature Control System through an
intake grille, located in the right side trim
panel behind the third row seats.The rear outlets
are located in the right side trim panel of the 3rd
Row seat. Do not block or place objects directly in
front of the inlet grille or heater outlets. The
electrical system could overload causing damage
to the blower motor.
• Auto Mode
The rear system automatically maintains the correct
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occupants.
• Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted
to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the
outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and
the floor outlets.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
83
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Operating Tips
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
84
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) coolant that meets the requirements of
Fiat Classification 9.55522 and 50% water is recommended. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Service and Care” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter
months is not recommended because it may cause
window fogging.
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in
the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started
again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase the blower
speed. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild but rainy or humid weather.
NOTE:
• Recirculation mode without A/C should not be used
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. When this occurs, recirculation will be
unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves.
Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,
and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water
drains. In winter months, make sure the air intake is
clear of ice, slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot
be totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Servicing and Care” for filter replacement
instructions.
Manual Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
(fig. 61)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 61)
85
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming,
interior lights and fog lights. (fig. 62)
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first
detent for parking light and instrument panel light
operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the second
detent for headlight, parking light and instrument panel
light operation.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
HEADLIGHTS ON WITH WIPERS
(AVAILABLE WITH AUTOMATIC
HEADLIGHTS ONLY)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned
on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO
position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when
the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this
feature.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Knowing Your Vehicle”
for further information.
CONTENTS
(fig. 62)
Headlight Switch
86
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system
on, rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to
the AUTO position. When the system is on, the
headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you
turn the ignition switch OFF. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in
an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition
switch while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch
ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
The front and rear fog lights may be operated as
desired when visibility is poor due to fog. The fog
lights will activate in the following order: Press
the headlight switch once and the front fog lights
come on. Press the switch a second time and the
rear fog lights will come on (front fog lights stay on).
Press the switch a third time and the rear fog lights turn
off (front fog stays on). Press the switch a fourth times
and the front fog turns off. For vehicles without front fog,
rear fog will activate on the first press.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable
using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for further information.
SERVICING
AND CARE
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the
ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the
driver when the driver's door is opened.
FRONT AND REAR FOG LIGHTS
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The front and rear fog light switch is built into the
headlight switch. (fig. 63)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 63)
Fog Light Switch
87
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
turn signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights.
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column. (fig. 64)
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there
is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever
is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC
(for versions/markets, where provided) and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1.6 km with either turn signal on.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 64)
Multifunction Lever
88
NOTE:
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
DIMMER CONTROLS
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and
is located on the left side of the instrument panel.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
(fig. 65)
Rotating the left dimmer control upward with the
parking lights or headlights on will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open. This includes the glove box
light, but not the trunk light. To restore interior light
operation, either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle
the light switch.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 65)
Dimmer Controls
89
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
DOME LIGHT POSITION
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The
interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control
is in this position.
INTERIOR LIGHT DEFEAT (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
PARADE MODE (DAYTIME BRIGHTNESS
FEATURE)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
SERVICING
AND CARE
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SYSTEM
This system allows the driver to maintain proper headlight beam position with the road surface regardless of
vehicle load.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
The headlight leveling switch is located next
to the dimmer control on the left side of the
instrument panel.
CONTENTS
90
To operate, rotate the headlight leveling switch until
the appropriate number, which corresponds to the
load listed on the following chart, illuminates on the
switch.
0
Driver only, or driver and front passenger.
Driver, plus an evenly distributed load in
the luggage compartment. The total
1
weight of the driver and load does not
exceed the maximum load capacity of
the vehicle.
All seating positions occupied, plus an
evenly distributed load in the luggage
2
compartment. The total weight of
passengers and load does not exceed the
maximum load capacity of the vehicle.
Calculations based on a passenger weight of 75 kg.
MAP/READING LIGHTS
Refer to “Overhead Console” for further information
on Map/Reading Lights.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the WASHERS
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door or liftgate.
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located
on the left side of the steering column. (fig. 66)
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (for versions/markets, where provided). Refer to “Mirrors” in “Knowing Your Vehicle”
for further information.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located at the end of the lever. Refer to “Rear Window
Features” for further information on using the rear
window wiper/washer.
The interior lights will fade to off after approximately
30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once
the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position from the
OFF position.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
"Dome ON" position (extreme top position).
IN AN
EMERGENCY
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 66)
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
91
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
INTERMITTENT WIPER SYSTEM
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause
between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer control lever to one of the first
five detents to select the desired delay interval (fig. 67)
There are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate
the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every two
seconds to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds
between cycles at vehicle speeds below 16 km/h. At
speeds greater than 16 km/h, the delay varies from a
minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of
approximately 18 seconds between cycles.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle
speed. If the vehicle is moving less than 16 km/h, delay
times will be doubled.
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent
past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the
second detent past the intermittent settings for highspeed wiper operation. (fig. 68)
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the
“park” position if you turn OFF the ignition switch
while they are operating. The wipers will resume operation when you turn the ignition switch back to the
ON position.
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 67)
(fig. 68)
Front Wiper Control
92
Front Wiper Control
• Turn the windshield wipers OFF when
driving through an automatic car wash.
Damage to the windshield wipers may
result if the wiper control is left in any position
other than OFF.
• In cold weather, always turn OFF the wiper
switch and allow the wipers to return to the park
position before turning OFF the engine. If the
wiper switch is left ON and the wipers freeze to
the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may
occur when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning
to the “park” position. If the windshield wiper
control is turned OFF, and the blades cannot
return to the“park”position,damage to the wiper
motor may occur.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the second detent.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed
for two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever
and then resume the intermittent interval previously
selected.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the OFF position, the wipers will operate for two or
three wipe cycles and then turn OFF.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the
windshield could lead to a collision.You
might not see other vehicles or other obstacles.
To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with the
defroster before and during windshield washer
use.
MIST FEATURE
Push the washer knob, located on the end of the
multifunction lever, inward to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road
mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will
continue to operate until you release the lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
93
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
HEADLIGHT WASHERS
(for versions/markets, where
provided)
SAFETY
The Headlight Washers are recessed into the top of
the fascia, centrally located below each headlight.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
The windshield wiper/washer control lever operates
the headlight washers when the ignition switch is in the
ON position and the headlights are ON. The lever is
located on the left side of the steering column.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
The rear window wiper/washer control is located on
the right side of the steering column. (fig. 69)
Rotate the switch upward to the first detent
position for rear wiper operation.
NOTE: The rear wiper operates in an intermittent
mode only.
To use the headlight washers, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the second detent to activate the windshield washers
and release it. When this is done, the two stationary
washer nozzles at each headlight spray one timed
high-pressure spray of washer fluid onto each headlight
lens. In addition, the windshield washers will spray the
windshield and the windshield wipers will cycle.
NOTE: After turning the ignition switch and headlights ON, the headlight washers will operate on the
first spray of the windshield washer and then every
eleventh spray after that.
CONTENTS
(fig. 69)
Rear Wiper/Washer
94
Rotate the switch upward past the first detent
position to activate the rear washer. The washer
pump will continue to operate as long as the switch is
held. Upon release, the wiper will cycle three times
before returning to the set position. (fig. 70)
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is
turned to the LOCK position, the wiper will automatically return to the “Park” position. When the vehicle is
restarted, the wiper will resume function at whichever
position the switch is set at.
• Turn the rear wiper off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage
to the rear wiper may result if the rear
wiper switch is left in the ON position.
• In cold weather, always turn off the rear wiper
switch and allow the rear wiper to return to the
park position before turning off the engine. If the
rear wiper switch is left on and the rear wiper
freezes to the window, damage to the rear wiper
motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the rear wiper blade from returning to the
park position. If the rear wiper control is turned
off and the blade cannot return to the park
position, damage to the rear wiper motor may
occur.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 70)
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
95
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (for versions/markets, where provided). An indicator in the button will illuminate when
the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the
rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Failure to follow these cautions can
cause damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of
the rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution,
wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels
can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of
the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
96
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes
over accelerator operations at speeds greater than
40 km/h. (fig. 71)
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the
Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to
shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are
operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic
Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing
the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and
resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
(fig. 71)
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — RES +
3 — SET 4 — CANCEL
TO ACTIVATE
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light
in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the
system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time.
The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control
system on when not in use is dangerous.
You could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want.You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the system
OFF when you are not using it.
TO SET A DESIRED SPEED
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the
vehicle has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-)
button and release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET
button.
TO DEACTIVATE
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/
OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases
the set speed memory.
TO RESUME SPEED
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 32 km/h.
TO VARY THE SPEED SETTING
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can
increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the
button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1.6 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1.6 km/h.
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control
is set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released.
Release the button when the desired speed is reached,
and the new set speed will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1.6 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1.6 km/h.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
97
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
TO ACCELERATE FOR PASSING
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set
speed.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,
storage for sunglasses, an interior observation mirror
and an optional power sunroof switch. (fig. 72)
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain
the vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur
so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic
Speed Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a
constant speed.Your vehicle could go too fast for
the conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed
Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
CONTENTS
(fig. 72)
Overhead Console
98
COURTESY/READING LIGHTS
The overhead console has two courtesy lights. The
lights turn on when a door or the liftgate is opened.
If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed. The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press in on
each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press the lens a second time to turn each light
off. You may adjust the direction of these lights by
pressing the outside ring, which is identified with four
directional arrows. (fig. 73)
SUNGLASSES STORAGE
To access the storage compartment, press on the
raised bars on the compartment door in the center of
the console and release and the door will swing downward. (fig. 74)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 73)
(fig. 74)
Courtesy/Reading Light
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
99
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
INTERIOR OBSERVATION MIRROR
The convex interior observation mirror provides the
driver and front seat passenger a wide field of view to
conveniently view passengers sitting in the rear passenger seats. To use the interior observation mirror, press
on the raised bars on the compartment door and
release (the door will swing downward), then raise the
door until it is almost closed and release. The door will
latch in position to use the interior observation mirror.
NOTE: From the “observation mirror” position, the
door can only be closed.
To return to the full open position, the door must first
be closed and then opened by pressing the latch again
to release. (fig. 75)
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 75)
Observation Mirror
100
POWER SUNROOF SWITCH
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Refer to “Power Sunroof” for further information.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
STORAGE
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
instrument panel switch bank, above the climate
controls.
GLOVEBOX STORAGE
The glovebox storage compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel. Pull on the
release handle to open the glovebox storage compartment. (fig. 76)
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second
time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance,
the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate
even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery.
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 76)
Glovebox Storage Compartment
101
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
FLOOR CONSOLE STORAGE
An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the
floor console. (fig. 77)
SAFETY
CENTER CONSOLE STORAGE
There is a storage compartment located under the
center console armrest. (fig. 78)
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front
of the lid, to open the storage compartment. (fig. 79)
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
(fig. 78)
Center Console
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 77)
(fig. 79)
Floor Console Cubby Bin
102
Opened Storage Compartment
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music players, and other
handheld electronic devices should be stowed
while driving. Use of these devices while driving
can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
Sliding Armrest (for automatic transmission
only)
The center console armrest can also be slid rearward
for easy access to the storage area. (fig. 80)
FLIP 'N STOW™ FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
STORAGE (for versions/markets, where
provided)
The seat latch release-loop is located in the center of
the seat cushion between the seat cushion and the
seatback. Pull the loop upward to release the latch and
then forward to open the seat to the detent position.
(fig. 81)
NOTE: Make sure that objects inside the bin do not
interfere with the latch before closing the seat. Push
the seat cushion downward after closing it to make
sure it latches to the base.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 80)
Sliding Armrest
(fig. 81)
Front Passenger Seat Storage Compartment
103
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING!
Be certain that the seat cushion is
locked securely into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the seat will not provide
the proper stability for passengers. An improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious
injury.
SECOND-ROW PASSENGER SEAT
TEMPORARY STORAGE BIN
This is a temporary storage bin designed for use when
the seatback/armrest is down. Be sure to remove all
items from this bin before raising the seatback/armrest.
SECOND-ROW MAP POCKET AND
GROCERY RETAINERS
A map storage pocket and grocery retainers are located on the back of the drivers seatback. (fig. 82)
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 82)
Seat Storage And Grocery Retainers
104
IN-FLOOR STORAGE BIN WITH
REMOVABLE LINER
The liner can be removed for easy cleaning by lifting on
the notches as shown. (fig. 84)
NOTE: Position the front seat to at least a mid-track
position to provide easier access to the storage bin.
An in-floor storage bin is located behind each front
seat. Each 5.9 l bin can hold up to 12, 0.35 l cans, plus
ice, or other items. The removable bin liner allows for
easy filling, emptying, and cleaning.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
To access the bin, position the floor mat aside (for
versions/markets, where provided). Pull the door latch
release-loop upward to release the latch and then
forward to open the bin door. (fig. 83)
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 83)
(fig. 84)
In-Floor Storage
Removable Liner
105
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
A 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet is located in the
center console below the radio. The power outlet has
power available when the ignition switch in the ON/
RUN or ACC position. (fig. 85)
This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit. To preserve the heating element, do
not hold the lighter in the heating position.
A second 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet is located
inside the center console storage area. Power is available with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN, ACC or
LOCK position. (fig. 86)
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 85)
(fig. 86)
Front 12 Volt Power Outlet
106
Center Console 12 Volt Power Outlet
A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the
back of the center console. This power outlet has
power available when the ignition switch is in the
LOCK, ON or ACC position. (fig. 87)
A fourth fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the
left quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This power
outlet has power available when the ignition switch is in
the ON or ACC position. (fig. 88)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 87)
(fig. 88)
Rear Seat 12 Volt Power Outlet
Rear Cargo Area Power Outlet
107
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
• Do not exceed the maximum power
of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to
be replaced.
• The power outlet on the bottom of the center
console shares the fuse with the power outlet on
the back of the console.The combined usage must
not exceed 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow
the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
(fig. 89)
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this
type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
108
(fig. 89)
1 — F103 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin & Power
Outlet Console Rear
2 — F102 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel &
Power Outlet Left Rear Cargo Area
• Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug.
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders, located in the center floor
console, for the front passengers. (fig. 90)
For passengers in the second row there are two cupholders, located in the center armrest between the
two seats.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 90)
Floor Console Cupholders
109
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
When the armrest is folded flat the cupholders are in
the back of the Head Restraint. The Head Restraint can
be adjusted to better position the cupholders. (fig. 91)
For vehicles equipped with third row seating, there are
additional cupholders located in the trim panels.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
In addition to cupholders, vehicles may also be
equipped with bottle holders. The bottle holders are
located on the door trim panels. (fig. 92)
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in
the bottle holder, they can spill when the
door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful
when closing the doors to avoid injury.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 91)
(fig. 92)
Armrest Cupholders
110
Door Bottle Holder
POWER SUNROOF (for versions/
markets, where provided)
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console. (fig. 93)
(fig. 93)
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, and do not leave the key fob in
or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC
or ON/Run mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
OPENING SUNROOF — EXPRESS
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from
any position. The sunroof will open fully and stop
automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During
Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof
switch will stop the sunroof.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
111
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
112
OPENING SUNROOF — MANUAL MODE
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward to full open. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
VENTING SUNROOF — EXPRESS
Press and release the “Vent” button, and the sunroof
will open to the vent position. This is called “Express
Vent”, and will occur regardless of sunroof position.
During Express Vent operation, any movement of the
switch will stop the sunroof.
CLOSING SUNROOF — EXPRESS
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from
any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop
automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During
Express Close operation, any movement of the switch
will stop the sunroof.
SUNSHADE OPERATION
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
CLOSING SUNROOF — MANUAL MODE
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening
of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward
and release to Express Close.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof
is open.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (for versions/markets,
where provided) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be
minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
For versions/markets, where provided without
the ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC)
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
For versions/markets, where provided with the
EVIC
DOOR LOCKS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each
door trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors,
pull the inside door handle to the first detent. To
unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock knob on the
door trim panel upward. (fig. 94)
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
NOTE: The delay time is programmable using the
Uconnect® system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” for
further information.
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 94)
Manual Door Lock Knob
113
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle
doors before you drive as well as when you park
and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause severe personal injuries or death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate. (fig. 95)
If you press the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate.
This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key
Fob in the vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the OFF
position or closing the door will allow the locks to
operate. If a door is open, and the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime will sound as a
reminder to turn the ignition OFF.
CONTENTS
(fig. 95)
Power Door Lock Switch Location
114
Automatic Door Locks
The auto door lock feature default condition is disabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 24 km/h.
The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled
by your authorized dealer per written request of the
customer. Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is
enabled.
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to
0 km/h and the transmission shift lever is placed in
NEUTRAL or PARK.
3. The driver door is opened.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
feature in accordance with local laws.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
SERVICING
AND CARE
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for further information.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
feature in accordance with local laws.
CONTENTS
115
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
SYSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage The Child-Protection Door Lock
System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into
the child lock control and rotate it to the LOCK
position. (fig. 96) (fig. 97)
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, the door can be opened only by using
the outside door handle even though the inside door
lock is in the unlocked position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors
can only be opened from the outside when the
Child-Protection locks are engaged. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 96)
(fig. 97)
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
116
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the lock knob up to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window, and open the door with the
outside door handle.
To Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock
System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into
the child lock control and rotate it to the UNLOCK
position. (fig. 98)
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the desired position.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 98)
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
117
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
To Unlock From The Driver's Side:
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows
you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without
having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock
buttons.
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within
1.5 m of the driver's door handle, grab the driver's
front door handle to unlock the driver's door automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise
when the door is unlocked. (fig. 99)
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for
further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of
the driver’s front door handle. To select between
“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press”, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Knowing Your Vehicle”
for further information.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the RKE transmitter or
Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and will arm the theft
alarm.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 99)
Grabbing The Driver's Door Handle
118
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
To Enter The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within
1.5 m of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the
liftgate automatically.
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within
1.0 m of the liftgate, press the button underneath the
left side of the accent bar, which is located on the
liftgate below the glass, to lock or unlock the vehicle.
NOTE: All doors and the liftgate will unlock when the
front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of
the driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st
Press”).
(fig. 100)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 100)
Liftgate Unlock/Lock Button
119
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive
Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic
door unlock feature which will function if the ignition
switch is in the OFF position.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 1.5 m of the driver or passenger front door
handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and liftgate. (fig. 101)
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle's Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no
other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System
automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the
horn three times (on the third attempt ALL doors will
lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be
locked in the vehicle).
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 101)
Outside Door Handle Lock Button
120
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
(fig. 102)
NOTE:
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle.
This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is
locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect® System,
the key protection described in "Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter in
Vehicle" remains active/functional.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on
the vehicle’s interior door panel.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 102)
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
121
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver's door trim panel
control all of the door windows. (fig. 103)
There are single window controls on each passenger
door trim panel, which operate the passenger door
windows. The window controls will operate when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 103)
Power Window Switches
122
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®,
the power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the LOCK/
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The time is programmable. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for
further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle. Do not leave the key fob in or
near the vehicle or in a location accessible to
children,and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC
or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver's power window switch has an Auto-down
feature. Press the window switch past the first detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window
switch to the first detent and release it when you want
the window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
On some models, the driver and front passenger
power window switches have an Auto-up feature. Pull
the window switch up to the second detent, release,
and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during
the Auto-up operation, push down on the switch
briefly.
To close the window part way, pull the window switch
up to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during Autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when
the window is almost closed. To avoid
personal injury,be sure to clear your arms,hands,
fingers, and objects from the window path before
closing the window. Such entrapment may result
in serious injury.
Reset
It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate
the Auto-up/Auto-down feature. To do so, perform
the following steps:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for
an additional two seconds after the window is
closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two
seconds after the window is fully open.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
123
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
panel allows you to disable the window control on the
rear doors. To disable the window controls, press and
release the window lockout button (setting it in the
down position). To enable the window controls, press
and release the window lockout button again (setting it
in the up position). (fig. 104)
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 104)
Window Lockout Switch
124
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (for versions/markets,
where provided) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be
minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting
occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
LIFTGATE
The liftgate can be unlocked or locked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, the Keyless
Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) or by activating the
power door lock switch located on either front door
trim panel.
For further information on Keyless Enter-N-Go™
(Passive Entry), refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in
“Starting And Driving”.
NOTE: The liftgate cannot be unlocked or locked with
the manual door lock plungers on the door trim panels
or the door lock cylinder on the driver's door.
To open the unlocked liftgate, squeeze the handle and
pull the liftgate toward you. Gas props will raise and
support the liftgate in the open position. (fig. 105)
NOTE: Because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your
vehicle. These fumes could injure you and your
passengers.Keep the liftgate closed when you are
operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed, and
the blower switch on the climate control is set at
high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 105)
Liftgate Unlock/Lock Button
125
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
CARGO AREA FEATURES
RECHARGEABLE FLASHLIGHT
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The rechargeable LED flashlight stores in its charging
station in the left rear quarter trim panel. To remove it,
press on the indent on the side of the flashlight and
release. (fig. 106)
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for
high, twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
(fig. 107)
NOTE: Be sure to return the flashlight to its charging
station when not in use to ensure it is ready for
operation the next time you need it.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 106)
(fig. 107)
Rechargeable Flashlight
126
Three-Press Switch
CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
SEVEN PASSENGER SYSTEM FEATURES
FIVE PASSENGER SYSTEM FEATURES
• A large built-in storage bin with a hinged hardcover
located in the floor behind the third-row passenger
seats.
• A raised load floor that sits on top of a large built-in
storage bin.
• A tri-fold door built into the load floor that allows
easy access to items in the built-in storage bin.
• 60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer to “Seats” for further information.
• An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature, which extends cargo space even further. Refer
to “Seats” for further information.
• Cargo tie-downs.
• A retractable cargo area cover (for versions/markets,
where provided).
• 60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer to “Seats” in “Knowing your vehicle” for further
information.
• 50/50 split third-row passenger seats with fold flat
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer to “Seats” for further information.
• An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature, which extends cargo space even further. Refer
to “Seats” for further information.
• Cargo tie-downs.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
127
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
CARGO TIE-DOWNS
WARNING!
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for
a child seat tether strap.In a sudden stop
or collision, a tie-down could pull loose and allow
the child seat to come loose. A child could be
badly injured. Use only the anchors provided for
child seat tethers.
Cargo tie-downs are located on both rear trim panels.
These tie-downs should be used to secure loads safely
when the vehicle is moving. (fig. 108)
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and
passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling.To avoid loss of
control resulting in personal injury, follow these
guidelines for loading your vehicle:
• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits described on the label attached to the left door or left
door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to
sway.
SERVICING
AND CARE
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 108)
Cargo Tie-Downs
128
RETRACTABLE CARGO AREA COVER
(for versions/markets, where provided) —
FIVE PASSENGER MODELS
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in
the cargo area behind the top of the rear seats.
To install the cover, position it in the vehicle so that the
flat side of the housing faces upward. Then, insert
either the left or the right spring-loaded post (located
on the ends of the cover housing) into the left attachment point or the right attachment point (shown).
(fig. 109)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
The cover, when extended, covers the cargo area to
keep items out of sight. Notches in the trim panels near
the liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not
in use. You can also remove the cover from the vehicle
to make more room in the cargo area.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 109)
Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover
129
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Insert the spring-loaded post on the opposite end of
the cover housing into the attachment point on the
opposite side of the vehicle.
Grab the cover handle and pull it toward you. As the
cover nears the liftgate opening, guide the rear attachment posts (on both ends of the cover) into the
notches in the trim panels. Lower the cover to position
the posts into the bottom of the notches and release
the handle. (fig. 110)
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 110)
Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover
130
WARNING!
A cargo cover that is unsecured in the
vehicle could cause injury in a collision.It
could become airborne during a sudden stop and
strike someone inside the vehicle. Do not store
the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the
passenger compartment. Remove the cover from
the vehicle when taken from its mounting. Do not
store it in the vehicle.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left
side of the instrument panel. (fig. 111)
SAFETY
2. Outside of the vehicle, locate the safety latch lever
near the center of the grille between the grille and
hood opening. Push the safety latch lever to the
right and then raise the hood. (fig. 112)
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the
hole on the underside of the hood. (fig. 113)
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
(fig. 112)
Underhood Safety Latch
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 111)
(fig. 113)
Hood Release Lever
Hood Prop Rod
131
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
132
To prevent possible damage:
• Before closing hood, make sure the
hood prop rod is fully seated into its
storage retaining clips.
• Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm
downward push at the center front edge of the
hood to ensure that both latches engage. Never
drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not
fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK
(for versions/markets, where
provided)
The roof rack side rails on your vehicle are NOT
designed to carry a load without the addition of crossbars. Metal Crossbars can be purchased from your
FIAT dealer to provide a functional roof rack system.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle plus the load on the
luggage rack do not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
The roof rack cross rails and side rails together are
designed to carry cargo weight. The load must not
exceed 150 pounds or 68 kg, and it should be distributed uniformly over the cross rails.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle. Improperly secured
loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high
speeds, resulting in personal injury or property
damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when
carrying cargo on your roof rack.
• To prevent damage to the roof of your
vehicle, DO NOT carry any loads on the
roof rack without the crossbars installed.
The load should be secured and placed on top of
the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is
necessary to place the load on the roof, place a
blanket or other protective layer between the
load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle,
do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 68 kg. Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, should be
secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward
loads.This is especially true on large flat loads and
may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining system
will still function. However, there will be some loss of
overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident by
increased pedal travel during application and greater
pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle. In
addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the
hydraulic system, the “Brake System Warning Light”
will turn on as the brake fluid level drops in the master
cylinder.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required
to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that
required with the power system operating.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
133
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
134
WARNING!
• Riding the brakes can lead to brake
failure and possibly a collision. Driving
with your foot resting or riding on the brake
pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage.You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
• Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning
Light” on is dangerous. A significant decrease in
braking performance or vehicle stability during
braking may occur. It will take you longer to stop
the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to
control.You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system
controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel
lock-up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces
during braking. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS)” under “Knowing Your Vehicle/Electronic Brake
Control System” for further information.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws
of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ABS cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the
user's safety or the safety of others.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL
SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system commonly referred to as ESC.
This system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Control System
(TCS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
and Hill Start Assist (HSA). These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in
various driving conditions.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
When the vehicle is driven over 11 km/h, you may also
hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related
motor noises. These noises are the system performing
its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working
properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is
started and accelerated past 11 km/h.
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
SAFETY
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop)
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves
• Brake pedal pulsations
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
end of the stop
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible
to interference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment. This
interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock
braking capability. Installation of such equipment
should be performed by qualified professionals.
(Continued)
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
135
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
136
(Continued)
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
Anti-Lock Brake Light
The Anti-Lock Brake Light monitors the ABS.
The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Light remains on or comes on while driving,
it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will continue
to operate normally if the Brake System Warning Light
is not on.
If the ABS Light is on, the brake system should be
serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS Light does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
If both the Brake System Warning Light and the ABS
Light remain on, the ABS and Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly results in the
best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the
system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the
brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is
released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the
user's safety or the safety of others.
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration
and stability. A feature of the TCS functions similar to a
limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more
engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not
spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and
ESC are in the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” for further information.
ELECTRONIC ROLL MITIGATION (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the
rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle's
speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it
then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the
chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
137
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
138
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading,
road conditions, and driving conditions,
influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover
may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or
rollovers,especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles.The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety
or the safety of others.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability
of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
corrects for over-steering and under-steering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel.
Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the
actual path does not match the intended path, the ESC
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the condition of over-steer or understeer.
• Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• ESC cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent collisions resulting from the loss
of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillfull driver can prevent collisions.
• The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be explained in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started the system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving situations.
ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific
reasons as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional
information.
Partial Off
The “ESC OFF” button is located in the switch bank
above the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off”
mode, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” button and
the “ESC OFF” Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn
the ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC OFF”
button and the “ESC OFF” Indicator Light will turn off.
This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation. (fig. 114)
NOTE: To improve the vehicle's traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC
OFF” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the “ESC OFF” button. This may be
done while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off ” mode, the TCS
functionality of ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in theTCS section) has
been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will be illuminated.When in “Partial Off ”mode,
the engine power reduction of TCS is disabled,
and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off ” mode.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 114)
ESC OFF Button
139
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
140
ESC ACTIVATION/MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LIGHT AND ESC OFF
INDICATOR LIGHT
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If
this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and
the vehicle has been driven several kilometers at
speeds greater than 48 km/h, see your authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon
as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes
active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in Partial
OFF mode.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will
maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied
for a short period of time after the driver takes their
foot off of the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply
the throttle during this short period of time, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
roll down the hill. The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as
the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of
travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
Towing With HSA
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing
uphill is in REVERSE gear).
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills
with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a
trailer where the system will not activate and
slight rolling may occur, which could cause a
collision with another vehicle or object. Always
remember the driver is responsible for braking
the vehicle.
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will
not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or
PARK.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller
with your trailer, your trailer brakes may
be activated and deactivated with the brake
switch. If so, when the brake pedal is released,
there may not be enough brake pressure to hold
the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could
cause a collision with another vehicle or object
behind you. In order to avoid rolling down the hill
while resuming acceleration, manually activate
the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake
pedal.Always remember the driver is responsible
for braking the vehicle.
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the
vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission
in PARK and using the parking brake, it will roll
down the hill and could cause a collision with
another vehicle or object. Always remember to
use the parking brake while parking on a hill, and
that the driver is responsible for braking the
vehicle.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
141
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
142
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Knowing your vehicle” for further information.
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer. TSC activates automatically once
the excessively swaying trailer is recognized. When
TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power will be
reduced, and you will feel the brake being applied to
individual wheels in an attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying.
NOTE: The TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in
the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
• TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “TrailerTowing” in “Starting
and Driving” for further information.
• If TSC activates while towing a trailer, stop the
vehicle at the nearest safe location and adjust
the trailer load to eliminate the trailer sway.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in an
accident or serious personal injury.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM —
OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light”
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in making
repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable
and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on
could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect
fuel economy and driveability.The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
(for versions/markets, where provided)
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged,
a “Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If this occurs,
tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP
ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next
time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
143
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
144
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it
will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these
conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not
indicate that there is a problem with the power
steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power
steering pump may make noise for a short amount of
time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the
steering system. This noise should be considered
normal, and it does not in any way damage the
steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced
power steering assist could pose a safety
risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel
travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible.
Damage to the power steering pump may occur.
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an
authorized dealer.
Do not use chemical flushes in your
power steering system as the chemicals
can damage your power steering components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level
surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure
accurate fluid level reading. Do not overfill. Use
only manufacturer's recommended power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid
from all surfaces.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
0.07 BAR for every 6.5°C. This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours, or driven less than 1.6 km after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure
molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Technical Specifications” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The
tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven.
This is normal and there should be no adjustment for
this increased pressure.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
145
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
146
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the
recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low
tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to
turn off. The system will automatically update and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off
once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 25 km/h in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
• The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels.
TPMS pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style.Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor
damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using
an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to your local dealership
to have your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap.This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem,which could damage theTire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check
the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Receiver Module
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
BASE SYSTEM
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors
to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of
the four active road tires. Should this occur, you should
stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of
each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
Once the system receives the updated tire pressures,
the system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 25 km/h in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
147
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
148
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled, this
sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still
exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists.
A system fault can occur due to any of the following:
NOTE:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
25 km/h, the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime
will sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will
not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale
Light will turn on upon the next ignition switch cycle.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact
spare, the TPMS will update automatically and the
TPMS Telltale Light will turn off, as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
25 km/h in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
TPMS Deactivation And Reactivation —
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as
when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on
your vehicle.
PREMIUM SYSTEM (for versions/markets,
where provided)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic
sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors,
mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem,
transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with those not equipped
with TPM Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for at least
20 minutes above 25 km/h. The TPMS will chime and
the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. Upon the next ignition
switch cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or turn on
the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check
the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
The TPMS consists of the following components:
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
To reactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with those equipped with
TPM Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 25 km/h. The TPMS will chime and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds.
• Receiver module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
IN AN
EMERGENCY
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
149
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
150
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of
the four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display a
graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with
the low tire pressure values in a different color. An
"Inflate Tire to XXX" message will also be displayed.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those displayed
in a different color in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in
the "Inflate Tire to XXX" message. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update, the graphic display in the EVIC
will return to the original color, and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 25 km/h
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
ServiceTPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC will display a
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, and the "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
The EVIC will also display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message is then followed with a graphic display with
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the
pressure values are still being received from the TPM
sensors but they may not be located in the correct
vehicle position. The system still needs to be serviced
as long as the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message is
displayed.
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will
not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle,
the TPMS Telltale Light will remain on and a chime
will sound. In addition, the graphic in the EVIC will
still display a different color pressure value. An
"Inflate Tire to XXX" message will also be displayed.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
25 km/h, the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition,
the EVIC will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message for a minimum of five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime
will sound, the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the
EVIC will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact
spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the TPMS Telltale Light will turn off and the
graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value
instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 25 km/h in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
151
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
152
TPMS Deactivation And Reactivation —
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as
when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on
your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with those not equipped
with TPM Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 25 km/h. The TPMS will chime and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” text message, and
the graphic will display “- -“ in place of four tire
pressure values. Upon the next ignition switch cycle,
the TPMS will no longer chime or turn on the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light, or display the text
message in the EVIC. However, the graphic will still
display “- -.“
To reactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with those equipped with
TPM Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 25 km/h. The TPMS will chime, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds, the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” text message, and the graphic will display tire
pressure values to show that the TPMS is receiving
sensor data.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Transmitter and receivers operate on a carrier frequency of 433.92 MHz as required by EEC regulations.
These devices must be certified to conform to specific
regulations in each individual country. Two sets of
regulations are involved: ETS (European Telecommunication Standard) 300–220, which most countries use,
and German BZT federal regulation 225Z125, which is
based on ETC 300–220 but has additional unique requirements. Other defined requirements are noted in
ANNEX VI of COMMISSION DIRECTIVE 95/56/EC.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
REAR PARK ASSIST (for versions/
markets, where provided)
The Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible
indications of the distance between the rear fascia and
a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. Refer to “Park Assist System Usage
Precautions” for limitations of this system and recommendations.
Park Assist will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the ON/RUN position.
Park Assist can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If Park Assist is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 11 km/h or above.
The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
9 km/h.
PARK ASSIST SENSORS
The four Park Assist sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that
is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can
detect obstacles from approximately 30 cm up to
200 cm from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
PARK ASSIST WARNING DISPLAY
The Park Assist Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect®
System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” for further
information.
The Park Assist Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between
the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Settings” for further information.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
153
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
PARK ASSIST DISPLAY
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will
turn ON indicating the system status. (fig. 115) (fig. 116)
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 115)
(fig. 116)
Park Assist Ready
154
Park Assist System Off
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the
EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous. (fig. 117)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
(fig. 118) (fig. 119)
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
(fig. 118)
Fast Tone
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 117)
(fig. 119)
Slow Tone
Continuous Tone
155
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert
operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
156
Rear Distance
(cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arcs
Greater than
200 cm
None
None
WARNING ALERTS
200-100 cm
100-65 cm
Single 1/2Second Tone
3 Solid
(Continuous)
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARK ASSIST
Park Assist can be enabled and disabled using the
Uconnect® System. The available choices are: Off,
Sound Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” for further information.
When the Park Assist soft-key is pressed to disable the
system, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” for further information. When the shift lever is
moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE at or
below 11 km/h.
65-30 cm
Slow
Fast
Less than
30 cm
Continuous
3 Slow
Flashing
2 Slow
Flashing
1 Slow
Flashing
SERVICE THE REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the Rear Park Assist
system has detected a fault condition, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will actuate a single
chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST”, “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or
“SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for
further information. When the shift lever is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a fault condition, the EVIC will display the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST”,
“SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM” message for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE. Under this condition, Park Assist will not
operate.
If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST” appears in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or
other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM” appears in the EVIC, see your authorized
dealer.
CLEANING THE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
Clean the sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft
cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM USAGE PRECAUTIONS
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice,
mud, dirt and debris to keep the Park Assist system
operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of Park Assist.
• When you turn Park Assist off, the EVIC will display
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn Park Assist off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and Park Assist is turned off, the EVIC will
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• Clean the Park Assist sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The Park Assist system might not
detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
• Ensure that the Park Assist system is turned OFF if
objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
are placed within 30 cm from the rear fascia/bumper
while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in
the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” message to be displayed in the EVIC.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
157
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
• Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
Park Assist.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing
up even when using Park Assist. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up.You are responsible for safety
and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
CONTENTS
158
(Continued)
• Before using Park Assist, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the
sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP
CAMERA (for versions/markets,
where provided)
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio
screen appears again.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView®
Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your
vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire
surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five
seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
License plate.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the
width of the vehicle and will show separate zones that
will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances
for each zone:
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 30 cm
30 cm - 1 m
1 m or greater
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera.Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up.You are responsible for
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
(Continued)
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or death.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(Continued)
159
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView®
should only be used as a parking aid.The
ParkView® camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
TURNING PARKVIEW® ON OR OFF —
WITH TOUCH SCREEN
Perform the following steps on the touch screen to
turn the Parkview® Backup Camera ON or OFF:
1. Press the “More” soft-key.
2. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
160
4. Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview®
Backup Camera” to enable/disable.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(for versions/markets, where
provided)
Refer to your Uconnect® User Manual.
SOUND SYSTEMS
Refer to your Uconnect® User Manual.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO
CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the
rear surface of the steering wheel. The left and righthand controls are rocker-type switches with a pushbutton in the center of each switch. Reach behind the
steering wheel to access the switches. (fig. 120)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 120)
Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
161
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
162
RIGHT-HAND SWITCH FUNCTIONS
• Press the top of the switch to increase the volume.
LEFT-HAND SWITCH FUNCTIONS FOR
MEDIA (I.E., CD) OPERATION
• Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the
volume.
• Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next
track.
• Press the button in the center of the switch to
change modes (i.e., AM, FM, etc.).
• Press the bottom of the switch once, either to listen
to the beginning of the current track or to listen to
the beginning of the previous track, if it is within eight
seconds after the current track begins to play.
LEFT-HAND SWITCH FUNCTIONS FOR
RADIO OPERATION
• Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station up from the current setting.
• Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next
listenable station down from the current setting.
• Press the button in the center of the switch to tune
to the next preset that you have programmed.
• Pressing the switch up will request the system to
start playing the next track in the current play sequence with wrap around to the beginning of the play
sequence. If you are currently playing track 5, press
the switch up twice to begin playing track 7 (if
available).
• The button in the center of the left-hand switch has
no function in this mode.
UCONNECT® MULTIMEDIA VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES™)
(for versions/markets, where
provided)
Getting Started
Your rear seat Video Entertainment System (VES™) is
designed to give your family years of enjoyment. You
can play your favorite CDs or DVDs, listen to audio
over the wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety
of standard video games or audio devices. Please review this Owner's Manual to become familiar with its
features and operation.
• With the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position,
turn the radio on by pushing the ON/OFF Volume
Control knob.
• Screen located in the overhead console: Unfold
the overhead LCD screen by pushing the button on
the overhead console behind the screen. (fig. 121)
• When the Video Screen is open and a DVD is
inserted into the radio, the screen turns on automatically, the headphone transmitters turn on and
playback begins.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 121)
Overhead Video Screen
163
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to
operate the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES™).
• The Remote Control
• The Touch-Screen Radio (for versions/markets,
where provided)
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA
input jacks located on the back of the center console.
Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks)
on the rear of the center console
enable the monitor to display video
directly from a video camera, connect video games for display on the
screen, or play music directly from an
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
MP3 player.
1. Video in (yellow)
2. Left audio in (white)
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
164
3. Right audio in (red)
When connecting an external source to the AUX
input, be sure to follow the standard color coding for
the VES™ jacks:
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the
vehicle's Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter
section in your vehicle's Owner's Manual for more
information.
Ensure the remote control channel selector switch and
Headphone switch (IR channel) are the same number.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight AUX 1,
by either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or
by repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then
press ENTER on the Remote Control.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key.
2. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to display
the Rear Entertainment Controls.
3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, touch the
“Power” soft-key.
4. Touch the “1” or “2” soft-key for the channel
desired and press “Source” soft-key to select the
desired mode.
Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2
While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is
on Channel 2.
Important Notes For Single Video Screen
System
Using The Remote Control
• In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1 and right side equates to Channel 2.
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control
and the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a
video is playing then only a small banner will appear
on the bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, either press
Up/ Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to
highlight the desired audio source or repeatedly
press the MODE button on the remote until the
desired audio source appears on the screen.
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key.
2. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to display
the Rear Entertainment Controls.
3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, touch the
“Power” soft-key.
4. Touch the “1” or “2” soft-key for the channel
desired then press the “SOURCE” soft key to select
the desired mode.
• VES™ is able to transmit two channels of stereo
audio simultaneously.
• If a video source is selected on Channel 1, then
Channel 2 is for audio only.
• When selecting a video source on Channel 1, the
video will display on the screen and the audio will be
heard on Channel 1 in the headphones.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even
when the Video Screen is closed.
Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio
1. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after
the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen
or starts playing the first track.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
165
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
166
Using The Remote Control
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key.
2. While looking at the Video Screen, highlight DISC
by either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or
by repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then
press ENTER.
2. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to display
the Rear Entertainment Controls.
NOTE:
4. Touch the “1” or “2” Source soft-key based on the
channel you want to change and touch the “Disc”
soft-key. To exit touch the “X” at the top right of
the screen.
• The VES™ system will retain the last setting when
turned off.
• Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio screen is
not available in some regions or locations, the vehicle
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking brake must be engaged even when the vehicle is
parked. Refer to local and state laws.
• Touching the screen on a Touchscreen radio while a
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control functions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play,
Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper
corner will turn off the remote control screen functions.
3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, touch the
“Power” soft-key.
NOTE: Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio
while a DVD is playing full screen brings up basic
control functions for DVD play such as DVD Menu,
Seek Up/Down, Navigating through the menus, Exit.
The basic control functions screen will time out and
disappear from the screen.
Remote Control Operation
Quick Reference Chart
NOTE:
This chart provides a quick reference of the remote
control button functions for the different radio modes
and menu screens.
• Ensure the remote control channel/screen selector
switch is set to the screen or channel to be controlled.
• Ensure the headphone channel selector switch is set
to the screen or channel to be listened to.
Standard Screens
Remote
Control Button
AM/FM/
MW/LW
DISC
AUX/AUX1/AUX2
Power
Light
Up Arrow Next
Seek Up*
Next
Track
Down Arrow
Prev
Seek Down*
Previous
Track
Right Arrow FF
Tune Up*
Fast Forward
Screen ON/OFF
Remote Backlight ON/OFF
Audio: Next Track
Not AvailVideo Play: Next Chapter
able
Video Menu: Selection Up
Audio: Previous Track
Video Play: Previous
Not AvailChapter
able
Video Menu: Selection
Down
Audio: Fast Forward
Not AvailVideo Play: Fast Forward
able
Video Menu: Selection
Right
Menu Screens
Mode
Screen
Select
Setup
Menu
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
Selection
Up
Selection
Up
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Selection
Down
Selection
Down
SERVICING
AND CARE
Selection
Right
Selection
Right
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
167
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
Standard Screens
Remote
Control Button
AM/FM/
MW/LW
SAFETY
DISC
AUX/AUX1/AUX2
Left Arrow RW
Tune Down*
Fast
Rewind
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
Enter
Show
Numeric
Entry Menu*
Show
Numeric
Entry
Menu
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Back
Not Available
Not Available
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
SERVICING
AND CARE
Audio: Not Available
Setup
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
168
Audio: Fast Rewind
Video Play: Fast Rewind
Video Menu: Selection
Left
Audio: Show Numeric
Entry
Video Play: Not Available
Video Menu: Activate
Selected Item
Audio: Not Available
Video Play: Not Available
Video Menu: Previous
Menu
Not Available
Not Available
Video Play: Show/Hide
Settings
Menu Screens
Mode
Screen
Select
Setup
Menu
Not Available
Selection
Left
Selection
Left
Not Available
Activate
Selected
Item
Not Available
Not Available
Return
to Std
Screen
Return to
Std
Screen
Audio:
Not Available
Video:
Show/Hide
Display
Settings
Menu
Not Available
Return to
Std
Screen
Standard Screens
Remote
Control Button
AM/FM/
MW/LW
DISC
AUX/AUX1/AUX2
Not Available
Show Disc
Options
Menu
Play/Pause
Not Available
Pause if
playing,
else
resume
play
Stop
Not Available
Stop
Not Available
Not Available
Menu
Mute
Slow
Audio: Disc Options
Menu
Video Play: Show
Disc Menu
Audio: Pause if
playing/resume
Video Play: Pause if
playing/resume
Video Menu: Activate
selected item
Not Available
Menu Screens
Mode
Screen
Select
Setup
Menu
Not Available
Not Available
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Mute/Unmute Headphones
Audio: Not Available
Video Play: Slow
Not Availplay/resume
able
Video Menu: Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Stop
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
169
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
Standard Screens
Remote
Control Button
AM/FM/
MW/LW
DISC
AUX/AUX1/AUX2
SAFETY
Audio: Not Available
Status
Not Available
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
170
Not Available
Video Play: Show Mode
Info
Audio:
Not Available
Video:
Show
Mode Info
Prog Down
Not Available
Advance
to Next
Mode
Mode
Prog Up
Menu Screens
Mode
Screen
Select
Setup
Menu
Next
Preset*
Previous
Preset*
Not Available
Not Available
Next Disc (if player is
changer)
Previous Disc (if player is
changer)
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Show
Mode
Select
Item
Not Available
Not Available
Ensure remote control selector switch is set to Screen
or Channel to be controlled: 1 OR 2. Ensure headphone selector switch is set to Screen or Channel to be
listened to: 1 OR 2. *No action when mode is shared
with cabin speakers. (fig. 122)
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To
hear audio while the screen is closed, press the
Power button to turn the headphone transmitter
on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
pressed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or
off. The remote backlighting turns off automatically
after five seconds.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
When the selector switch is in the Channel 1
position, the remote controls the functionality of
headphone Channel 1. When the selector switch is
in the Channel 2 position, the remote controls the
functionality of headphone Channel 2.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
5. ▸▸ – In radio modes, press to seek the next tunable
station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast forward through the current audio track or video
chapter. In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
6. ▾ / Prev – In radio modes, press to select to the
previous station. In disc modes, press to advance to
the start of the current or previous audio track or
video chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the
menu.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
7. MENU – Press to return to the main menu of a DVD
disc, or to select playback modes (RANDOM for a
CD).
8. ▸ / || (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
9. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play
CONTENTS
(fig. 122)
Remote Control
171
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
10. PROG Up/Down – When listening to a radio
mode, pressing PROG Up selects the next preset
and pressing PROG Down selects the previous
preset stored in the radio. When listening to compressed audio on a data disc, PROG Up selects the
next directory and PROG Down selects the previous directory. When listening to a disc in a radio
with a multiple-disc changer, PROG Up selects the
next disc and PROG Down selects the previous
disc.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
11. MUTE – Press to mute the headphone audio output for the selected channel.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
13. STATUS – Press to display the current status while
in a video mode display.
12. SLOW – Press to slow playback of a DVD disc.
Press play (▸) to resume normal play.
SERVICING
AND CARE
14. MODE – Press to change the mode of the selected
channel. See the Mode Selection section of this
manual for details on changing modes.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
15. SETUP – When in a video mode, press the SETUP
button to access the display settings (see the
display settings section) to access the DVD setup
CONTENTS
172
menu, select the menu button on the radio. When
a disc is loaded in the DVD player (for versions/
markets, where provided) and the VES™ mode is
selected and the disc is stopped, press the SETUP
button to access the DVD Setup menu. (see the
DVD Setup Menu of this manual.)
16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, press to
return to the previous screen. When navigating a
DVDs disc menu, the operation depends on the
disc’s contents.
17. ◂◂ – In radio modes, press to seek to the previous
tunable station. In disc modes, press and hold to
fast rewind through the current audio track or
video chapter. In menu modes use to navigate in
the menu.
18. ENTER – Press to select the highlighted option in
a menu.
19. ▴ / NEXT – In radio modes, press to select to the
next station. In disc modes, press to advance to
the next audio track or video chapter. In menu
modes, use to navigate in the menu.
Remote Control Storage
The video screen(s) come with a built in storage
compartment for the remote control which is accessible when the screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index finger to pull and rotate the
remote towards you. Do not try to pull the remote
straight down as it will be very difficult to remove. To
return the remote back into its storage area, insert one
long edge of the remote into the two retaining clips
first, and then rotate the remote back up into the other
two retaining clips until it snaps back into position.
(fig. 123)
Locking The Remote Control
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a
parental control feature.
• To disable the Remote Control from making any
changes, press the Video Lock button and follow the
radio’s instructions (select menu, rear ves, lock). If
the vehicle is not equipped with a DVD player, follow
the radio’s instructions to turn Video Lock on. The
radio and the video screen(s) indicate when Video
Lock is active.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
• Pressing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition
OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control operation of the VES™.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for
operation. To replace the batteries:
IN AN
EMERGENCY
• Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 123)
The Remote Control Storage
173
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of
audio using an infrared transmitter from the video
screen.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
position and that the channel is not muted and the
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
(fig. 124)
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on
before sound can be heard from the headphones. To
conserve battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off approximately three minutes after the
rear video system is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector switch is in the same position as the headphone
selector switch.
NOTE:
IN AN
EMERGENCY
• When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote
is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are
tuned to the audio of the VES™ Channel 1.
SERVICING
AND CARE
• When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote
is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are
tuned to the audio of the VES™ Channel 2.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
174
2. Press the MODE button on the remote control.
(fig. 124)
1. Volume Control
2. Power Button
3. Channel Selection Switch
4. Power Indicator
3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such
as a DVD Video), pressing STATUS shows the status
on a popup banner at the bottom of the screen.
Pressing the MODE button will advance to the next
mode. When the mode is in an audio only source
(such as FM), the Mode Selection menu appears on
screen.
Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime
Limited Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty
covers the initial user or purchaser ("you" or "your") of
this particular Unwired Technology LLC ("Unwired")
wireless headphone ("Product"). The warranty is not
transferable.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to
navigate to the available modes and press the ENTER button to select the new mode.
How Long Does The Coverage Last? This warranty lasts as long as you own the Product.
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press
the BACK button on the remote control.
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
operation. To replace the batteries:
• Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup
of the headphones, and then slide the battery cover
downward.
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
What DoesThisWarranty Cover? Except as specified below, this warranty covers any Product that in
normal use is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty does not cover any damage or defect that results
from misuse, abuse or modification of the Product
other than by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will
wear over time through normal use, are specifically not
covered (replacement foam is available for a nominal
charge). UNWIRED TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE
FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS
OR PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR
ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT,
NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions may not allow the
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
175
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may
also have other rights, which vary from jurisdiction to
jurisdiction.
What Will Unwired® Do? Unwired®, at its option,
will repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired®
reserves the right to replace any discontinued Product
with a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE
SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS
FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING
DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Only Channel 1 displays video images. When in video
mode the image is displayed on the full screen, however
Channel 2’s functionality is still available. A popup
banner at the bottom of the screen is displayed momentarily over the video image. While in video mode
and Channel 2 is selected on the remote control
selector switch, the first remote control key press will
activate the popup banner indicating Channel 2’s status. While the banner is still visible, any subsequent
remote control key press for Channel 2 shall initiate
the requested remote control command. (fig. 125)
Displaying Video
The video screen has two different operating modes, a
video mode (when displaying video such as DVD video,
Aux video, etc.) and an information mode as shown in
Figure 116. Because the VES™ is a dual channel system,
Information Mode is displayed in a split screen format.
When in Information Mode, the left side of the screen
is referred to as Channel 1 and the right side of the
screen is referred to as Channel 2.
CONTENTS
(fig. 125)
Popup Banner
176
In a two-screen system, the video for Channel 1 is
displayed on the first rear seat screen and the video for
Channel 2 is displayed on the second rear seat screen.
Information Mode is displayed in split screen, the left
side of the screen (Channel 1) shows the status/mode
of the first rear seat screen and the right side of the
screen (Channel 2) shows the status/mode of the
second rear seat screen.
When Channel 1 is in a video mode, the image is
displayed on the first rear seat screen as a full screen
image. A popup banner at the bottom of the screen is
displayed momentarily over the video image showing
any change in status of Channel 2.
When Channel 2 is in video mode, the image is displayed on the second rear seat screen as a full screen
image. A popup banner at the bottom of the screen is
displayed momentarily over the video image showing
any change in status of Channel 1.
System Information
Information Mode Display
When information mode is active, the current mode
setting for both audio channels is displayed. In addition
to the items called out by number, the remaining
information displays the current status of the source
(such as station frequency, name, preset or track number, song title, artist name, album name, etc.).
• Channel 1 Mode – Displays the current source for
Channel 1.
• Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute — Audio: The audio
only icon is not used on Channel 1, in a single screen
system. Mute: when the Mute icon is displayed, the
audio for Channel 1 has been muted using the remote control’s MUTE button.
• Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute — Audio: Only in a
single screen system: The audio only icon is displayed
on Channel 2 when Channel 1 is in a video mode.
Mute: when the Mute icon is displayed, the audio for
Channel 2 has been muted using the remote control’s MUTE button.
• Channel 2 Mode — Displays the current source for
Channel 2.
• Channel 2 ENTER Button Action — When the
ENTER button on the remote control is pressed
with the "INPUT FILE #" button visible on the
screen, the screen shows a numeric entry keypad
which allows you to enter a specific track number on
data discs and HDD (see Numeric Keypad Menu
section of this manual). Also, Enter Button Action –
“INPUT TRK #” to enter a specific track number on
audio discs.
• Remote Locked Out — When the icon is displayed,
the remote control functions are disabled.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
177
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
• Clock — Displays the time.
• Channel 1 Shared Status — When the icon is displayed, the audio for Channel 1 is also shared with
the radio and playing through the cabin speakers.
Numeric Keypad Menu
(fig. 126)
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2
shows DIRECT TUNE, pressing the remote control’s
ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu. This
screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency
or track number. To enter the desired digit:
1. Press the remote control’s navigation buttons (▴, ▾,
▸, ◂) to navigate to the desired digit.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 126)
Numeric Keypad Menu
178
2. When the digit is highlighted, press the remote
control’s ENTER button to select the digit. Repeat
these steps until all digits are entered.
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button
and press the remote control’s ENTER button.
4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go
button and press the remote control’s ENTER button.
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc,
pressing the remote control’s MENU button displays a
list of all commands which control playback of the disc.
Using the options you can activate or cancel Random
play.
Options Menu
(fig. 127)
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the
disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the “Options” soft-key activates the Options Settings menu.
From this menu you can adjust Audio, Subtitles, Angle
and Title.
Display Settings
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the
disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the remote control’s SETUP button activates the Display
Settings menu. These settings control the appearance
of the video on the screen. The factory default settings
are already set for optimum viewing, so there is no
need to change these settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, press the remote control’s
navigation buttons to select an item, then press the
remote control’s navigation buttons to change the
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
menu option and press the remote control’s ENTER
button.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 127)
179
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
• Close the video screen.
• To change the current audio mode, press the remote
control’s MODE button. This will automatically select the next available audio mode without using the
MODE/SOURCE Select menu.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard,
verify that the headphones are turned on (the ON
indicator is illuminated) and the headphone selector
switch is on the desired channel. If the headphones are
turned on, press the remote control’s power button to
turn audio on. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
Disc Formats
The DVD player is capable of playing the following
types of discs (12 cm or 8 cm diameter):
• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see
notes about DVD Region Codes)
• Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
CONTENTS
• CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed
audio format files
• Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
180
DVD Region Codes
The DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the
DVD disc does not match the region code for the
player, the disc will stop playing and a warning will be
displayed.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the DVD player,
the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default
(most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, but the
Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level.
If you increase the volume level to account for this
change in level, remember to lower the volume before
changing the disc or to another mode.
Recorded Discs
The DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player
will also play DVD-Video content recorded to a
DVD-R, DVD-RW and DVD-ROM discs.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there
may be cases where the DVD player may not be able to
play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
help avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines when recording discs.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
closed are playable.
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple
CD-Audio sessions, the player will renumber the
tracks so each track number is unique.
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or UDF format.
CD-DA may also be used for PCM Audio contained
on CD-Based Data.
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
playable in the DVD player, check with the disc recording software publisher for more information about
burning playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling recordable
discs (CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R and DVD-RW) is with a
permanent marker. Do not use adhesive labels as they
may separate from the disc, become stuck, and cause
permanent damage to the DVD player.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3,WMA AND
ACC)
The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1
Audio Layer 3 with data bitrates from 32 to 320 kbit/s,
including variable bit rates), WMA (All Standard 8.x,
9.x Windows Media Audio) and ACC (MPEG-4 audio;
sampling frequencies 8 to 48 kHz; mono and stereo)
audio files with the from a CD Data disc (usually a
CD-R or CD-RW).
• The DVD player always uses the file extension to
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
end with the extension ".mp3" or ".MP3", WMA files
must always end with the extension ".wma" or
"WMA", and ACC files must end with the extensions
“.acc” or “.m4a”. To prevent incorrect playback, do
not use these extensions for any other types of files.
• For MP3 files, ID3 tag data v1, v1.1, v2 and v2.4 (such
as artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those downloaded from many online music stores) will not play.
The DVD player will automatically skip the file and
begin playing the next available file.
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD
player will automatically skip the file and begin playing
the next available file.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
181
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
182
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and
192Kbps and the recommended fixed bit rate for
WMA files is between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit
rates are also supported. For both formats, the
recommended sample rate is either 44.1kHz or
48kHz.
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s
or DVD player’s ▴ button to advance to the next file,
or the ▾ button to return to the start of the current
or previous file.
• To change the current directory, use the remote
control’s PROG UP and Down buttons or Rewind/
skip back and fast fwd/skip forward.
Disc Errors
If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a "Disc
Error" message is displayed on the Radio display and
the disc is automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or
incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a
"Disc Error" message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by
skipping forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end
of the disc is reached, the DVD player will return to the
beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of
the first track.
The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot
conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior temperature is above 120°F. When this occurs, the DVD
player will display "High Temp" and will shut off the
display until a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD
player.
Product Agreement
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision,
and is intended for home or other limited viewing uses
otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Dolby® Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby", "MLP
Lossless", and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights
reserved.
General Information
This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL
(for versions/markets, where
provided)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to
be plugged into the USB port.
SAFETY
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G
iPod® and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software
versions may not fully support the iPod® control
features. Please visit Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® User’s
Manual.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
183
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the follow- PHONES
ing precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft
cloth, wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid
scratching the disc.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
184
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may
become too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance
from your radio. This condition may be lessened or
eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna.
This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the
repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that
the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile
phone operation.
ADDING FUEL
FUEL FILLER CAP (GAS CAP)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap has been designed for use
with this vehicle. (fig. 128)
Locking Fuel Filler Cap (for versions/markets,
where provided)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a locking fuel cap.
Use the specific blade key to lock/unlock this fuel cap.
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door
reinforcement.
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from
using an improper fuel tank filler tube
cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling,do not“top
off ” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit
in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is
removed or the tank is being filled.
(Continued)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 128)
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
185
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
186
(Continued)
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
• Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
(for versions/markets, where provided)
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged,
a “Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If this occurs,
tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP
ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next
time the vehicle is started.
SAFETY
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint) (for versions/markets, where provided)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) that span the front, second, and third row
seating for the driver and passengers seated next to
a window
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or ISOFIX feature also can
be used to hold infant and child restraint systems.
For more information, refer to ISOFIX — Child Seat
Anchorage System.
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the air bag to have
different rates of inflation based on several factors,
including the severity and type of collision.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers
can suffer much greater injuries if you
are not properly buckled up.You can strike the
interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled
up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor
driver and cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
187
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking
the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle
should be belted at all times.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
a combination lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
(Continued)
188
(Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous.
Seat belts are designed to go around the large
bones of your body.These are the strongest parts
of your body and can take the forces of a collision
the best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place
could make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you
could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow
these instructions to wear your seat belt safely
and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into
one another in a collision, hurting one another
badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt
for more than one person, no matter what their
size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
(fig. 130)
2. The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near
the back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull
out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as
far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap.
(fig. 129)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 129)
(fig. 130)
Pulling Out Lap/Shoulder Belt
Connecting Latch PlateTo Buckle
189
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly.The
lap portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury.Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and
neck injury.A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren't as strong as shoulder
bones.Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.You are
more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do
not wear your shoulder belt.The lap and shoulder
belt are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion,
pull up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap
belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on
the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the belt in a collision. (fig. 131)
CONTENTS
(fig. 131)
Removing Slack From Belt
190
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase
the risk of internal injury in a collision.
The belt forces won't be at the strong hip and
pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it
snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can't straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
(Continued)
must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver's seat and front passenger's seat, the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the belt away from your neck. Push and fully
depress the button above the webbing to release the
anchorage, then move it up or down to the position
that fits you best. (fig. 132)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
SERVICING
AND CARE
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 132)
(Continued)
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
191
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position and if you are taller than
average you will prefer a higher position. When you
release the anchorage try to move it up and down to
make sure that it is locked in position.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt:
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
2. At about 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate, grasp
and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
SERVICING
AND CARE
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the
top of the latch plate.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
192
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed
to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a
collision. These devices may improve the performance
of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about
the occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work
for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner
or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be
readily identified by any markings, only through visual
inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will
be split in two halves, with the front half being soft
foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the
gap between the back of the occupant’s head and the
AHR. This system is designed to help prevent or
reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front
passenger in certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or
may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on several
factors, including the severity and type of the impact.
(fig. 133)
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle's
seat until the head restraints are placed
in their proper positions in order to minimize the
risk of neck injury in the event of a collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting
and positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting
Active Head Restraints” in “Knowing Your Vehicle”.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
(fig. 133)
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front
Half (Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back
Half (Decorative Plastic Rear
Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
193
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the
Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact
that they have moved forward (as shown in step three
of the resetting procedure).
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism. (fig. 135) (fig. 136)
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
(fig. 134)
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR
at a comfortable position.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
(fig. 135)
CONTENTS
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
(fig. 134)
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
194
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half. (fig. 137)
NOTE:
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the
Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
ACTIVE HOOD SYSTEM (for versions/
markets, where provided)
The Active Hood system is intended to enhance pedestrian protection by elevating the vehicle’s hood
upon an impact with a pedestrian or other object. The
system is automatically activated when the vehicle is
moving within a specified vehicle speed range. In order
to detect a range of pedestrians, other objects that are
impacted may result in an Active Hood deployment.
Deployment Sensors And Controls
The Electronic Pedestrian Protection Module (EPPM)
determines if deployment of the actuators in a frontal
impact is required. Based on the impact sensors signals,
the EPPM determines when to deploy the actuators.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
(fig. 136)
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking
Mechanism
CONTENTS
(fig. 137)
AHR In Reset Position
195
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
196
The impact sensors are located within the front bumper area.
The EPPM monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the Active Hood system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the key
is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or not in
the ignition, the Active Hood system is not on and the
Active Hood will not deploy.
The EPPM contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the actuators even if the battery loses
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Service Active Hood System
If the EPPM has deployed the Active Hood, or if it
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns
on the Air Bag Warning Light and it will display the
“SERVICE ACTIVE HOOD” message in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), for versions/
markets, where provided. A single chime will sound if
the Air Bag Warning Light comes on again after initial
startup. It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that
could affect the Active Hood system. The diagnostics
also record the nature of the malfunction. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, or if “SERVICE ACTIVE
HOOD” appears in the EVIC, see your authorized
dealer.
In the event of an Active Hood deployment, the vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer. The hood
hinges must be serviced and the actuator assemblies
replaced to restore system functionality.
Following an Active Hood deployment, the hood position can be temporarily reset by pushing down at the
rear edge over the hood hinges as the internal pressure
of each actuator is relieved. The temporary hood reset
position is intended to improve forward driving visibility over the hood until the vehicle can be serviced. The
temporary hood reset position will leave the hood
approximately 5 mm above the fender surface. (fig. 138)
(fig. 138)
Temporary Hood Reset Position
The front bumper assembly may affect proper operation of the Active Hood system. The front bumper
components should be inspected for damage and replaced if necessary in the event of a frontal impact, even
if it occurs at a low rate of speed.
NOTE: After any Active Hood deployment, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam
the rear of the hood to reset it. Press the
rear of the hood down until an audible
and tactile detent is detected (approximately 5 mm
above the fender). This should secure both hood
hinge reset mechanisms.
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in
your instrument panel or the “SERVICE
ACTIVE HOOD” message in the EVIC could mean
you won’t have the Active Hood to enhance pedestrian protection. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, see your authorized dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Modifications to any part of the Active Hood
system could cause it to fail when you need it. Do
not modify the components or wiring. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add an aftermarket front bumper or cover.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
Active Hood system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an
Active Hood system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your
Active Hood system.The Active Hood may deploy
accidentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made.Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for any hood service.
• Drivers must be aware of pedestrians. Always
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, and obstructions.You are responsible for
safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
197
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
198
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver
and front passenger (for versions/markets, where provided with front passenger BeltAlert®) to fasten their
seatbelts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is
on. If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
until both front seatbelts are fastened.
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the
vehicle speed is over 8 km/h, by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the
entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are
fastened. After the sequence completes, the Seatbelt
Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective
seatbelts are fastened. The driver should instruct all
other occupants to fasten their seatbelts. If a front
seatbelt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater
than 8 km/h, BeltAlert® will provide both audio and
visual notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (for
versions/markets, where provided). It is recommended
that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo
is properly stowed.
BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated,
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (for versions/
markets, where provided with BeltAlert®) seat belt
remains unfastened.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat
belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother
safe is the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the belt low so that it does not come across
the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips
will take the force if there is a collision.
Child Restraints
(fig. 139)
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
WARNING!
• “Extreme Hazard! Do not use a
rearward-facing child restraint on a seat
protected by an air bag in front of it!” Refer to
visor and door shut face mounted labels for information.
• In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a projectile inside the vehicle.
The force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured. Any
child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper
restraint for the child's size.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 139)
199
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
200
Mass Group
Group —
up to 10 kg
Group 0+ —
up to 13 kg
Group 1 –
9 to 18 kg
Group II –
15 to 25 kg
Group III —
22 to 36 kg
Front Passenger
X
Seating Position (or other site)
Intermediate
Rear Outboard
Rear Center
Outboard
*U
N/A
**U
Intermediate
Center
U
X
*U
N/A
**U
U
X
*U
N/A
**U
U
X
*U
N/A
**U
U
X
*U
N/A
**U
U
Key of letters used in the table above:
• U = Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
• X = Seat position not suitable for children in this
mass group.
Vehicle ISOFIX Positions Chart
Mass
Group
Carrycot
0 — up to
10 kg
0+ — up
to 13 kg
Size
Class
Fixture
Front
Passenger
Rear
Outboard
Rear
Center
F
G
ISO/L1
ISO/L2
(1)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
E
ISO/R1
X
X
X
(1)
X
X
X
E
ISO/R1
X
X
X
D
ISO/R2
X
X
X
C
ISO/R3
X
X
X
(1)
X
X
X
Intermediate
Outboard
Right /
Left
**IUF / X
X / **IUF
X
*IUF /
*IUF
X
*IUF /
*IUF
*IUF /
*IUF
*IUF /
*IUF
X
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
Intermediate
Center
Other
Sites
**IUF
X
X
X
X
X
*IUF
X
X
X
*IUF
X
*IUF
X
*IUF
X
X
X
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
201
Vehicle ISOFIX Positions Chart
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
Mass
Group
Size
Class
Fixture
Front
Passenger
Rear
Outboard
Rear
Center
D
ISO/R2
X
X
X
C
ISO/R3
X
X
X
B
B1
A
ISO/F2
ISO/F2X
ISO/F3
(1)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Intermediate
Outboard
Right /
Left
*IUF /
*IUF
*IUF /
*IUF
IUF / IUF
IUF / IUF
IUF / IUF
X
(1)
X
X
X
(1)
X
X
X
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
I – 9 to
18 kg
II – 15 to
25 kg
III – 22 to
36 kg
Key of letters used in the table above:
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
202
(1) = For the CRS which do not carry the ISO/XX size
class identification (A to G), for the applicable mass
group, the car manufacturer shall indicate the vehicle
specific ISOFIX child restraint system(s) recommended
for each position.
Intermediate
Center
Other
Sites
*IUF
X
*IUF
X
IUF
IUF
IUF
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
• IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints
systems of universal category approved for use in the
mass group.
• IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint
systems (CRS) given in the attached list. These ISOFIX CRS are those of the “specific vehicle”, “restricted” or “semi-universal” catagories.
• X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child
restraint systems in this mass group and / or this size
class.
• * = Seats in front of child restraint seats may need to
be adjusted forward to install the child restraint seat.
• ** = No access to 3rd row seating positions if
Carrycot is installed in vehicle.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner's Manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Before buying any restraint system, make
sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Child Size, Height,
Weight or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Children who are at least two years
old or who have out-grown the
height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Recommended Type of
Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in
the rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
203
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
204
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight limit
of their rear facing child safety seat. Two types of child
restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers
and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant
carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either
rearward-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in
the rearward-facing direction than infant carriers do, so
they can be used rearward-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at
least two years old. Children should remain rearwardfacing until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in
front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rearward facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride
forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child
seats and convertible child seats used in the forwardfacing direction are for children who are over two years
old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or
height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat
with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat
belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent
over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is
against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It
could come loose in a collision.The child could be
badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or ISOFIX
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not
leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster
Seat follow these steps:
1. Slide the second row seat to the full rear position to
use the Integrated Child Booster Seat.
NOTE: The second row bench with Integrated Child
Booster Seat must remain in the full rear position
during use.
2. Pull the release loop forward to release the latch
and seat cushion. (fig. 140)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
Integrated Child Booster Seat — for
versions/markets, where provided
The Integrated Child Booster Seat is located in each
outboard second-row passenger seat. The Booster
Seat is designed for children weighing between 22 and
39 kg and between 119 cm and 145 cm tall.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 140)
Release Loop
205
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
3. Lift the seat cushion up and push back to lock it in
the booster seat position. (fig. 141)
NOTE: The lap portion of the seat belt should be low
on the hips and as snug as possible.
4. Place the child upright in the seat with their back
firmly against the seatback.
7. Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear
a “click.” (fig. 142)
5. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
6. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around the child’s
lap.
8. To remove the slack from the lap belt, pull upward
on the shoulder portion of the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 141)
Booster Seat
206
(fig. 142)
WARNING!
Securely lock the seat cushion into position before using the seat. Otherwise,
the seat will not provide the proper stability for
child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat cushion could cause serious injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear
seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the
front of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting
all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then
the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle.
If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit
periodically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move
the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of
the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
207
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
208
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Up to 29 kg
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
ISOFIX –
ISOFIX –
Lower
Seat Belt + Top
Lower
Seat Belt Only
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Anchors Only
Tether Anchor
X
More than 29 kg
Up to 29 kg
More than 29 kg
ISOFIX Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called ISOFIX. The ISOFIX system has
three vehicle anchor points for installing ISOFIXequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback and one top tether anchorage located
X
X
X
X
X
behind the seating position. These anchorages are used
to install ISOFIX-equipped child seats without using
the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages.
In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint.
Locating The ISOFIX Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible
when you lean into the rear seat to install the
child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your
finger along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion. (fig. 143)
Locating The ISOFIX Anchorages
(Second Row Seating)
In addition, there are tether strap anchors
located behind each rear seatback, near to
the floor. (fig. 144)
ISOFIX child restraint systems will be equipped with a
rigid bar on each side. Each will have a connector to
attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing infant restraints will also
be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will
have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether
anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 143)
(fig. 144)
ISOFIX Anchorages
Tether Strap Anchors
209
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Center Seat ISOFIX
This vehicle has 5 lower ISOFIX anchorages in the rear
seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages D and E are used for the left outboard position
behind the driver (3). Anchorages B and C are used for
the center seating position (2). Do not install an ISOFIX child restraint using anchorages C and D. This is
not a ISOFIX position in your vehicle.
You can install up to two child seats using the ISOFIX
system at the same time. If you are installing three child
restraints, you must use the seatbelt to install the
center child restraint. You can use either the ISOFIX
anchors for positions (1) and (3) or the vehicle’s seat
belt for installing the child seats in the outboard positions. (fig. 145)
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 145)
210
Options for installing two child seats using the ISOFIX
anchorages in this vehicle:
1. Right and left outboard seating positions (1 and 3):
Install the child seats in the right and left outboard
seating positions using lower anchorages A and B,
and D and E. Do not use the center seat anchorage,
C. If the child seats do not block the center seat belt
webbing and buckle, the center seat belt can be
used to restraint an occupant or child restraint in
the center seating position.
2. Left outboard and center seating positions (3 and 2):
Install the first child seat in the left outboard seating
position using lower anchorages D and E. Install the
second child seat using the center anchorages, B and
C. Do not use the outer anchorage closest to the
opposite door, A. Do not use the remaining right
outboard seating position (1) for any occupant. The
center child restraint will block the seat belt buckle
for this position.
WARNING!
• Use anchorages B and C to install a
ISOFIX child restraint in the center seating position (2). Do not install a ISOFIX child
restraint using anchorages C and D.This is not an
ISOFIX position in your vehicle.
• A child restraint installed in the center position
(2) will block the seat belt buckle for the empty
right outboard seating position (1). Do not use
this seat for another occupant.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint.
• If you are installing three child restraints next
to each other, you must use the seat belt and the
center tether anchor for the center position.You
can then use either the ISOFIX anchors or the
vehicle’s seat belt for installing the child seats in
the outboard positions. Please refer to “Installing
the ISOFIX Child Restraint System” for typical
installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install An ISOFIX Child Restraint:
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the
Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt
each seating position has.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower connectors and
on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can
more easily attach the connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. For some second row
seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise
the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle,
you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room for the
car seat.
4. Attach the connectors of the child restraint to the
lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
211
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
212
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage”
for directions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 25 mm in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
When using the ISOFIX attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to secure
child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if
they play with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt
retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the
ISOFIX system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat
belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the
seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seatbelt. Remind all children
in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that
they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the ISOFIX anchorages can
lead to failure of an infant or child restraint.The
child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the
manufacturer's directions exactly when installing
an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by correctlyfitted child restraints. Under no circumstances
are they to be used for adult seat belts,harnesses,
or for attaching other items or equipment to the
vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion
of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that
it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by
pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then
letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it
is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the
webbing is pulled back into the retractor. For additional
information on ALR, refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.” The
cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion
of the seatbelt tight when webbing is pulled tight and
straight through a child restraint’s belt path.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need
to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish
to move it to its rear-most position to make room
for the child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the car seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the
webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking
mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat
step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you
push the child restraint rearward and downward
into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten
the tether strap. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 25 mm in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
213
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
214
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — for versions/markets,
where provided
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need
to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint
to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish
to move it to its rear-most position to make room
for the child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the car seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you
push the child restraint rearward and downward
into the vehicle seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten
the tether strap. Refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 25 mm in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to
the belt path opening of the child restraint, you may
have trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens,
disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist
the short buckle-end belt up to three full turns to
shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with
the release button facing out, away from the child
restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to complete the
installation of the child restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten
the buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle,
turn the buckle around one half turn, and insert the
latch plate into the buckle again. If you still cannot make
the child restraint installation tight, try a different
seating position.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to
provide better access to the tether anchorage. If
there is no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available. (fig. 146)
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path for the strap between the anchor and the child
seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear
head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where
possible, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the two posts. If not possible,
lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint
to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. (fig. 147)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 146)
(fig. 147)
Seat Track Release Lever
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
215
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bags are certified to the regulations for
Advanced Air Bags.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap
could lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into
the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air
Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver's Advanced Front
Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger's Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in
the instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words SRS AIR BAG are embossed on the air bag
covers. (fig. 148)
(fig. 148)
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
CONTENTS
216
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolsters
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The
SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and
their covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
• Instrument Panel
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB). The Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags are marked with an air bag label
sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
NOTE:
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC)
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners
• After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of
collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC), which may receive information
from the front impact sensors.
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
217
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during
an impact that requires air bag deployment. This low
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or
near the air bag on the instrument
panel, because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough
to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
functional.The protective covers for the air bag
cushions are designed to open only when the air
bags are inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee
bolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SAB)
SAB may provide enhanced protection to help protect
an occupant during a side impact. The SAB is marked
with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the
front seats. (fig. 149)
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between
the front and side of the seat's trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the
left air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the
right air bag only.
CONTENTS
(fig. 149)
Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label
218
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each air bag features inflated chambers placed
adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that
reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries. The
curtains deploy downward, covering both windows on
the impact side. (fig. 150)
NOTE:
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
SAFETY
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured
or killed.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags during
impacts that require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and
right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do not stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the location
of the SABIC. The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags; the
performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing serious
injury.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 150)
Supplemental Side Curtain Air Bags
(Continued)
219
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
220
(Continued)
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags,
do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced
Front Air Bags and the Supplemental Driver Side Knee
Air Bag work with the knee impact bolsters to provide
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint system. Occupants, including children
who are up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air
bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
especially children, should not lean on or sleep against
the door, side windows, or area where the SAB or
SABIC air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or
child restraint.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensor's signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags, and
front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on
several factors, including the severity and type of impact.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a regulated safety system required
for this vehicle.
Always sit upright as possible with your back against
the seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of
the child.
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing the seat belts
in certain frontal collisions depending on several factors, including the severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the
risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce
substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location
of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that
produce a severe initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF
position, or in the ACC position, the air bag system is
not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power
or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the selfcheck, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in
your instrument panel could mean you
won't have the air bags to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb
check when the ignition is first turned on, stays
on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel
and on the right side of the instrument panel. When the
ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front
Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
221
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates are possible,
based on several factors, including the collision type and
severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper right side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size.
The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds.
This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes.
The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
(SAB) Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
are designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
SERVICING
AND CARE
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the
side air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
222
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a large quantity of non-toxic gas.
The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the
space between the occupant and the door. The SAB
fully inflates in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag
moves at a very high speed and with such a high force
that it could injure you if you are not seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the side air
bag inflates. This especially applies to children.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity and
type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy
the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
side curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag
pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way
and covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain air bag is only about 9 cm thick when it is inflated.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC
in determining appropriate response to impact events.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
or until the ignition is cycled off.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
System functions after an event, the ignition switch
must be changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold.
The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally
heal quickly. However, if you haven't healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering,
see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of
the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for
air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle
on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's
instructions for cleaning.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
223
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies
replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) system serviced as well.
Air Bag Warning Light
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any
of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
CONTENTS
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
cycled to the ON/RUN.
SERVICING
AND CARE
224
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four
to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air
bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to
“Fuses” in “In An Emergency” for the proper air bag
fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in
this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if
a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your
pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and
possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic
braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• On seven passenger models, do not drive the
vehicle with the second row passenger seat in the
easy entry/exit position (seat cushion flipped upward and seat moved forward), as this position is
only intended for entering and exiting the third
row seats. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(Continued)
225
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
226
(Continued)
• On seven passenger models, do not allow a
passenger to sit in a third row seat with the
second row seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision,
the passenger could slide underneath the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed.DO NOT use
the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running,adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the
vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect
the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question
regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the seat
belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should turn on and remain on for
four to six seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light
is not lit during starting, or if the light stays
on, flickers, or turns on while driving, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should be
able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See
your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of
your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that
they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and increase
the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings
on top of already installed floor mats.Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the
size of the pedal area and interfere with the
pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis.
Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats
that have been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into
the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving.
Objects can become trapped under the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of
vehicle control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(Continued)
227
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
228
(Continued)
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation
or mounting can cause interference with the
brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation
causing loss of control of the vehicle.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights
and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check
turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other
objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the
tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if
gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering
fluid (for versions/markets, where provided), or brake
fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located
and corrected immediately.
STARTING AND DRIVING
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 500 km. After the
initial 100 km, speeds up to 80 or 90 km/h are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good
break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear
can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy-conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades,
refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Servicing And
Care”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand kilometers of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
STARTING PROCEDURES
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their
seat belts.
SAFETY
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission
into PARK, and remove the key fob from the
ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always lock
your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
229
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave animals or children inside parked
vehicles in hot weather; interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the
push of a button, as long as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
NORMAL STARTING – GASOLINE ENGINE
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
CONTENTS
230
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior
to the engine starting, press the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the vehicle speed
is above 8 km/h, the ENGINE START/STOP button
must be held for two seconds before the engine
shuts off. The ignition switch position will remain in
the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and
the button is pressed twice to the OFF position. If
the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pressed once, the EVIC will
display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out
of the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after
30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to
the OFF position.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions –
With Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal
(In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to
an ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC,
RUN and START. To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps.
• Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition switch to the ACC position,
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second
time to change the ignition switch to the RUN
position,
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position.
EXTREME COLD WEATHER (BELOW −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use
of an externally powered electric engine block heater is
recommended.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
SAFETY
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable
liquids into the throttle body air inlet
opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This
could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
get it started. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and
vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from
a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.This type of start can be dangerous if done
improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “In An
Emergency” for further information.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
231
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather" procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it.
3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for
10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs,
release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait
10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
SERVICING
AND CARE
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
NORMAL STARTING – DIESEL ENGINE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position by
pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button twice.
CONTENTS
232
2. Watch the “Wait To Start Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in
“Warning Lights And Messages” for further information. It will illuminate for two to ten seconds or
more, depending on engine temperature. When the
“Wait To Start Indicator Light” goes out, the engine
is ready to start.
3. DO NOT press the accelerator. To start the engine,
the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
Press the brake pedal (automatic transmission only)
or press and hold the clutch pedal (manual transmission only) while pressing and holding the ENGINE
START/STOP button. Release the button when the
engine starts.
NOTE: The starter motor may need to remain
engaged for up to 30 seconds in very cold conditions
until the engine is started. If the vehicle does not start,
release the button. Wait for 25-30 seconds and then
try to start again.
4. After the engine starts, allow it to idle for approximately 30 seconds before driving. This allows oil to
circulate and lubricate the turbocharger.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. With the vehicle stopped, place the shift lever in
NEUTRAL/PARK, then press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position, the
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes
of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF
position.
• If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position, the
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes
of inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 km/h and the
engine is not running.
• If the shift lever is not in PARK and the vehicle speed
is above 8 km/h, the ENGINE START/STOP button
must be held for two seconds before the engine
shuts off. The ignition switch position will remain in
the ACC position until the vehicle is stopped and the
button is pressed twice to the OFF position.
Turbocharger “Cool Down”
NOTE: Letting the engine idle after extended operation allows the turbine housing to cool to normal
operating temperature.
The following chart should be used as a guide in
determining the amount of engine idle time required to
sufficiently cool down the turbocharger before shut
down, depending upon the type of driving and the
amount of cargo.
TurboCharger “Cool Down” Chart
Idle Time
Turbo(In MinDriving
charger
utes)
CondiLoad
TemperaBefore
tions
ture
Shut Down
Stop & Go
Empty
Cool
Less than 1
Stop & Go
Medium
Warm
1
Highway
Medium
Warm
2
Speeds
Maximum
Gross
CombinaCity Traffic
Warm
3
tion
Weight
Rating
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
233
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
TurboCharger “Cool Down” Chart
Idle Time
Turbo(In MinDriving
charger
utes)
CondiLoad
TemperaBefore
tions
ture
Shut Down
Maximum
Gross
Highway
CombinaWarm
4
Speeds
tion
Weight
Rating
Maximum
Gross
Uphill
CombinaHot
5
Grade
tion
Weight
Rating
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear.
Manual Transmission
The parking brake lever is located in the center console. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as
firmly as possible. To release the parking brake, pull the
lever up slightly, press the center button, then lower
the lever completely. (fig. 151)
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 151)
Parking Brake
234
Automatic Transmission
NOTE:
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage. (fig. 152)
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use PARK position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
(fig. 152)
Parking Brake
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(Continued)
235
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
• Before exiting a vehicle,always apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into
PARK and first gear or REVERSE for a manual
transmission, and remove the key fob from the
ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always lock
your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
(Continued)
CONTENTS
236
(Continued)
• Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in PARK, a manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so
may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage
or injury.
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake
system malfunction is indicated. Have
the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
(for versions/markets, where
provided)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave
the vehicle unattended without having
the parking brake fully applied.The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in
the vehicle, especially on an incline.
Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As
you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. (fig. 153)
Use each gear in numerical order, do not skip a gear. Be
sure the transmission is in first gear, (not third), when
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch
can result from starting in third.
For most city driving you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, sixth gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,
or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the
clutch.
To shift into REVERSE, pull up on the ring just below
the gear shift knob and then move into the REVERSE
(R) position.
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
NOTE: During cold weather, until the transmission
lubricant is warm, you may experience slightly higher
shift efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the
transmission.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 153)
Shift Pattern (Six-Speed)
237
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
DOWNSHIFTING
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
prolong engine life.
If you skip a gear while downshifting or
downshift at too high of a vehicle speed,
these conditions may cause the engine to
overspeed if too low of a gear is selected and the
clutch pedal is released.Damage to the clutch and
the transmission can result from skipping a gear
while downshifting or downshifting at too high of
a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is held
pressed (i.e., not released).
IN AN
EMERGENCY
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift
down to second or first when descending a steep
grade.
SERVICING
AND CARE
When turning a corner, or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be overburdened.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
238
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
(for versions/markets, where
provided)
Damage to the transmission may occur if
the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
engine is at idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse.You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is idling
normally and your foot is firmly pressing the
brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, turn the engine off, and remove the key
fob.When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
KEY IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the
driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK.
This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
CONTENTS
239
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in
PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the ignition switch must be
turned to the ON/RUN position (engine running or
not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
Four-Speed or Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear
range. You must press the brake pedal to move the shift
lever out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift
Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the
shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE
position.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick® shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift
control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further information). Moving the shift lever into the
AutoStick® (+/-) position (below the Drive position)
activates Autostick® mode, providing manual shift
control and displaying the current gear in the instrument cluster. (fig. 154)
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred kilometers.
CONTENTS
(fig. 154)
Shift Lever
240
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is
cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking
the transmission. The engine can be started in this
range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is
in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake.Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not completely in PARK. Check by
trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with
the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
(Continued)
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
241
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
242
(Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the key
fob.When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in the PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever. Do not leave the key fob
in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible
to children), and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode.A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Before moving the shift lever out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition switch
from the LOCK/OFF position to the ON/
RUN position, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
DRIVE (D)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never
turn off the ignition to coast down a hill.
These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions.You
might lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving
for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result in severe
transmission damage. Refer to “RecreationalTowing” in “Starting and Driving” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In An Emergency” for further
information.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds,
or while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick®
shift control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for
further information) to select a lower gear. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
243
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature
improves warm up time of the engine and transmission
to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the
torque converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque
Converter Clutch” in this section). During extremely
cold temperatures -27°C or below, operation may
briefly be limited to only second gear (for four-speed
transmission) or third gear (for six-speed transmission). Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing
the following steps:
Transmission Limp Home Mode
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at
your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the
problem could recur.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains in second gear (for four-speed transmission) or third gear (for six-speed transmission)
regardless of which forward gear is selected. PARK,
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (top gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present:
• The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
244
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature.
AUTOSTICK® (for versions/
markets, where provided)
• The engine coolant has reached an adequate temperature.
AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize
engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and
downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
• The vehicle speed is sufficiently high and the driver is
not heavily pressing the accelerator.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a
slightly different feeling or response during normal
operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle speed
drops or during some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are
warm (usually after 2 to 5 km of driving). Because the
engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
Using the AutoStick® shift control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the
transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the shift lever is in the AutoStick® position
(below the DRIVE position), it can be moved from side
to side. This allows the driver to manually select the
transmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever to
the left (-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an
upshift. The current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
245
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
246
In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right
(+) or left (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed
condition would result. It will remain in the selected
gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen,
except as described below.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when
necessary to prevent engine over-speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in any gear except top
gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in
second gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in
snow or icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is engaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick® is engaged.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick® mode, return the shift lever
to the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the
AutoStick® position at any time without taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface.The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could
skid, causing a collision or personal injury.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)
(for versions/markets, where
provided)
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive
(AWD). The system is automatic with no driver inputs
or additional driving skills required. Under normal
driving conditions, the front wheels provide most of
the traction. If the front wheels begin to lose traction,
power is shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The
greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater the
power transfer to the rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will
be sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve
vehicle launch and performance characteristics.
All wheels must have the same size and
type tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be
used. Unequal tire size may cause failure
of the power transfer unit.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
ACCELERATION
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces
is dangerous. Unequal traction can
cause sudden pulling of the front wheels. You
could lose control of the vehicle and possibly
have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
247
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
248
TRACTION
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for
a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in
a sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and
prevent damage to your vehicle.
FLOWING/RISING WATER
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a
path where water is flowing and/or rising
(as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear
away the road or path's surface and cause your
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore,
flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle
away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
• Always check the depth of the standing
water before driving through it. Never
drive through standing water that is
deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted
on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles
in the way before driving through the standing
water.
• Do not exceed 8 km/h when driving through
standing water.This will minimize wave effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components.
Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine
oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water.Do not
continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is
not covered by the NewVehicle LimitedWarranty.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits
your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do
not exceed 8 km/h when driving through standing
water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
249
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
250
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in
this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will
assist you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and
tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that
you do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of
all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition. The recommended way
to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on
a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 68 kg allowance
for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and
rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear
axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either
front or rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed
the maximum front or rear GAWR. A
dangerous driving condition can result if either
rating is exceeded.You could lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on
the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases, it should not
be less than 7% or more than 10% of the trailer load.
Tongue weight must not exceed the lesser of either the
hitch certification rating, or the trailer tongue chassis
rating. It should never be less than 4% of the trailer
load, and not less than 25 kg. You must consider tongue
load as part of the load on your vehicle and its’ GAWR.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted hitch system
may reduce handling, stability and braking performance and could result in an accident.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer
or a reputable trailer/dealer for additional information.
BREAKAWAY CABLE ATTACHMENT
European braking regulations for braked trailers up to
3,500 kg require trailers to be fitted with either a
secondary coupling or breakaway cable.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
The recommended location for attaching the normal
trailer's breakaway cable is in the stamped slot located
on the sidewall of the hitch receiver.
SAFETY
With Attachment Point
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
• For detachable tow bar, pass the cable through the
attachment point and clip it back onto itself. (fig. 155)
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by
the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
SERVICING
AND CARE
Trailer Sway Control
Refer to “TSC (Trailer Sway Control)” under “Knowing
Your Vehicle/Electronic Brake Control System” for
further information.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 155)
Detachable Ball Clip Loop Method
251
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
• For fixed ball tow bar, attach the clip directly to the
designated point. This alternative must be specifically
permitted by the trailer manufacturer since the clip
may not be sufficiently strong for use in the way.
(fig. 156)
Without Attachment Points
• For detachable ball tow bar, you must follow the
recommended manufacturer or supplier procedure.
(fig. 157)
• For fixed ball tow bar, loop the cable around the neck
of the tow ball. If you fit the cable like this, use a single
loop only. (fig. 158)
(fig. 157)
Detachable Ball Neck Loop Method
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 156)
(fig. 158)
Fixed Ball Clip Loop Method
252
Fixed Ball Neck Loop Method
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
(5 and 7 Passenger
Model
454 kg
1,100 kg
1,250 kg
1,100 kg
Max.Tongue Wt. ♦
(5 and 7 Passenger
Model)
2.4L/Automatic
2.0 sq m
22 kg
3.6L/Automatic
3.7 sq m
55 kg
2.0L Diesel/Manual
3.7 sq m
62 kg
2.0L Diesel/Automatic
3.7 sq m
55 kg
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds
♦ The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and it should
never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear
can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and
trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the
cause of many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped
on your trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
placard, located on the face of the driver's door or on
the driver's side “B” pillar, for the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
253
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the
first 805 km the new vehicle is driven.The
engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 805 km that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over 80 km/h and do not make
starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance
Schedule. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
GAWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury
accident. Follow these guidelines to
make your trailer towing as safe as possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and that it will not shift during travel.
When trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control.You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident.
• All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or
damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission,
steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the
chains to the frame or hook retainers of the
vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer
tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners.
(Continued)
CONTENTS
254
(Continued)
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade.When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Always, block or "chock" the
trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following
four ratings are not exceeded:
– Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Technical Specifications” for the
proper tire inspection procedures.
1. GVWR
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
2. GTW
– Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the
trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Towing Requirements – Tires
– Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
– Proper tire inflation pressures are essential for the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer
to “Tires – General Information” in “Technical Specifications” for proper tire inflation procedures.
– Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
– When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Technical Specifications” for proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
– When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake
controller is not required.
– Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
450 kg and required for trailers in excess of 750 kg.
If the trailer weighs more than 450 kg
loaded, it should have its own brakes, and
they should be of adequate capacity.Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake
lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer
stopping distances.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
255
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can
overload your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need them
and could have an accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance.When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a seven-pin or a
thirteen-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. (fig. 159)
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 159)
Seven-Pin Connector
256
Pin Number
1
2
3
4
5
Function
Left Turn Signal
Rear Fog Light
Ground/
Common
Return
Right Turn Signal
Right Rear
Position, Side
Marker Lights,
and Rear Registration Plate
Illumination
Device. b
Wire Color
Yellow
Blue
White
Green
Brown
Pin Number
6
7
Function
Wire Color
Stoplights
Red
Left Rear
Black
Position, Side
Marker Lights,
and Rear Registration Plate
Illumination
Device. b
b The rear position registration plate illumination device
shall be connected such that no light of the device has a
common connection with both pins 5 and 7.
(fig. 160)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 160)
Thirteen-Pin Connector
257
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
Pin Number
1
2
3a
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
4
5
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
258
6
7
Function
Left Turn Signal
Rear Fog Light
Ground/
Common
Return for
Contacts (Pins)
1 and 2 and
4 to 8
Right Turn Signal
Right Rear
Position, Side
Marker Lights,
and Rear Registration Plate
Illumination
Device. b
Stoplights
Left Rear
Position, Side
Marker Lights,
and Rear Registration Plate
Illumination
Device. b
Wire Color
Yellow
Blue
White
Green
Brown
Red
Black
Pin Number
8
9
Function
Wire Color
Reverse lights
Red/Black
Permanent
Brown/White
Power Supply
(+12V)
10
Power Supply
Red
Controlled by
Ignition Switch
(+12V)
11 a
Return for
White
Contact (Pin) 10
12
Reserve for
Red/Blue
Future
Allocation
13 a
Return for
White
Contact (Pin) 9
Note: The allocation pin 12 has been changed from
“Coding for coupled Trailer” to “Reserve for Future
Allocation.”
a The three return circuits shall not be connected
electrically in the trailer.
b The rear position registration plate illumination device
shall be connected such that no light of the device has a
common connection with both pins 5 and 7.
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Manual Transmission (for versions/markets,
where provided)
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid clutch slippage.
Automatic Transmission (for versions/
markets,where provided)
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, use the
AutoStick® shift control to manually select a lower
gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the transmission fluid and automatic transmission filter as specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.”
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Check the transmission fluid level (four-speed
transmission only) before towing. The six-speed transmission does not require a fluid level check before
towing. If, however, you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, see your authorized dealer immediately for assistance.
Electronic Speed Control (for versions/
markets, where provided)
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 16 km/h, disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads
to maximize fuel efficiency.
AutoStick®
• When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance
and avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose
“4” if the desired speed can be maintained. Choose
“3” or “2” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return
to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and
road conditions allow.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
259
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Trailer Tow Hitch Attaching Points And Overhang
Dimensions
A
N/A
B
366.71 mm
C
501.62 mm
D
628.69 mm
E (maximum overhang)
1051.93 mm
F
472.00 mm
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
TRAILER HITCH ATTACHING POINTS
Your vehicle will require extra equipment to tow a
trailer safely and efficiently. The trailer tow hitch must
be attached to your vehicle using the provided attaching points on the vehicle's frame. Refer to the following
chart to determine the accurate attaching points.
Other equipment, such as trailer sway controls and
braking equipment, trailer equalizing (leveling) equipment and low profile mirrors, may also be required or
strongly recommended. (fig. 161)
CONTENTS
(fig. 161)
260
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
Towing
Condition
Wheels OFF
the Ground
FWD MODELS MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
FWD MODELS
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
AWD MODELS
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
BEST METHOD
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
SAFETY
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift or
Dolly Tow
Flatbed
NONE
Rear
Front
ALL
• Ignition in ACC or ON/RUN
position
NOT ALLOWED
OK
BEST METHOD
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the
ground, or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED.
The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle
(behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all
four wheels OFF the ground.
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its
wheels on the ground can cause severe
transmission and/or power transfer unit
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models - Manual
Transmission
Front-wheel drive vehicles with manual transmissions may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the
ground) at any legal highway speed, for any distance, if
the manual transmission is in NEUTRAL and the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
These vehicles may also be towed using a tow dolly
(with the front wheels OFF the ground), or on a flatbed
or vehicle trailer (with all four wheels OFF the ground).
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
261
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
262
Failure to follow these towing methods
can cause severe engine and/or transmission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models - Automatic
Transmission
DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped
with an automatic transmission. Damage
to the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require towing, make sure all drive wheels
are OFF the ground.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
ground.
This vehicle may also be towed using a tow dolly (with
the front wheels OFF the ground).
Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
(fig. 162)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 162)
263
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
264
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTIONS
1. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is
either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for further information.
2. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the
ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb does
not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles.
In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and
will not require towing.
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause
damage to the engine control system.
It also could affect fuel economy and driveability.
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions.
This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park
over flammable substances such as dry plants,
wood,cardboard,etc.This could result in death or
serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
3. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light (for versions/markets,
where provided)
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several kilometers at speeds greater than 48 km/h, see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
4. Turn Signal Indicator Light
The left or right arrow will flash in unison
with the corresponding front and rear turn
signal lights when the turn signal switch is
operated. (Refer to “Lights” in “Knowing
Your Vehicle” for further information).
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
NOTE:
A chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than
1.6 km with either turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
5. High Beam Indicator
This light shows that the high beam headlights
are on. Pull the multifunction lever on the left
side of the steering column toward you to switch to
low beam. (Refer to “Lights” in “Knowing Your Vehicle”
for further information).
6. Front Fog Light Indicator (for versions/markets,
where provided)
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on. (Refer to “Lights” in “Knowing
Your Vehicle” for further information).
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
265
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
266
7. Odometer Display / Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) Display
Odometer
The odometer display shows the total distance the
vehicle has been driven.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. For further information, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Knowing Your Vehicle”.
8. Park/Headlight ON Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on. (Refer to
“Lights” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for further information).
9. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale light illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale
will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale
light after replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels.
TPMS pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style.Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor
damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. (Refer to “Tire Inflation Pressures” under “Tires —
General Information”and to“Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for
further information).
10. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to
ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check,
if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light
will flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for further information.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
267
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
268
11. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem
with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with
the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program
(ESP) system. In this case, the light will remain on until
the condition has been corrected. If the problem is
related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run
when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light
on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop
the vehicle.You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake
system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which
will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
12. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN
position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will continue
to operate normally if the Brake System Warning Light
is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be
serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefit of
Anti-Lock brakes. Furthermore, the ABS light should
be checked frequently to assure that it is operating
properly. If the light does not turn on, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer. (Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control System” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for
further information).
13. Fuel Cap Indicator
This symbol indicates the side of the vehicle
where the fuel filler cap is located.
14. Rear Fog Light Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog
lights are on. (Refer to “Rear Fog Lights” in
“Knowing Your Vehicle” for further information).
15. Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
16 seconds when the vehicle security system
is arming and then flash slowly when the
system is armed. The light will also turn on
for about three seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to ON/RUN. (Refer to “Vehicle Security
Alarm” or “Premium Security System” in “Knowing
Your Vehicle” for further information).
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
269
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IN AN EMERGENCY
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be
jump-started using a set of jumper cables and a battery
in another vehicle or by using a portable battery
booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done
improperly so please follow the procedures in this
section carefully.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP-START
The battery in your vehicle is located between the left
front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash
shield. To allow jump-starting, there are remote battery posts located on the left side of the engine
compartment. (fig. 163)
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and
precautions.
Do not use a portable battery booster
pack or any other booster source with a
system voltage greater than 12 Volts or
damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.It could rupture or explode
and cause personal injury.
(fig. 163)
Remote Battery Posts
CONTENTS
270
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective
Cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling
fan whenever the hood is raised. It can
start anytime the ignition switch is ON.You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously
injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and the manual transmission into
gear and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post. To remove the cover, press
the locking tab and pull upward on the cover.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set
the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each
other as this could establish a ground
connection and personal injury could result.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could
result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system
of the booster vehicle or the discharged
vehicle.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to
the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
SERVICING
AND CARE
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
CONTENTS
271
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
272
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause
the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point,
do not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper
cables in the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote
positive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your
vehicle, you should have the battery and charging
system inspected at your authorized dealer.
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular
phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
135 N·m
M12 x 1.25
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket Size
19 mm
**Use only FIAT recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean
or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
(fig. 164)
Wheel Mounting Surface
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
(fig. 164)
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. (fig. 165)
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 165)
Torque Patterns
273
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
274
After 40 km check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure
that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle
off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts
fully until the vehicle has been lowered.Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal injury.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING (for
versions/markets, where provided)
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the
side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the
danger of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never put any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
is on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only.The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed underneath a
cover in the rear storage bin in the cargo area. (fig. 166)
Spare Tire Location
The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the
vehicle and is held in place by means of a cable winch
mechanism.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the
side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the
danger of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
3. Set the parking brake.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
4. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transmission) or in GEAR (manual transmission).
IN AN
EMERGENCY
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
(fig. 166)
Jack Storage Location
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the
right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
SERVICING
AND CARE
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
CONTENTS
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
275
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Spare Tire Removal
NOTE: On seven-passenger models, fold the thirdrow passenger seats flat. This will provide more space
when accessing the jacking tools and when operating
the winch mechanism.
1. Remove the jack-handle components 1, 2 and 3
from storage and assemble them. (fig. 167)
2. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive
nut located in the jack storage area. Rotate the
jack-handle assembly counterclockwise until the
spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack
to allow you to pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
(fig. 167)
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
CONTENTS
276
NOTE: Assemble components 2 and 3 by seating the
small ball at the end of component 2 in the small hole at
the end of component 3. This will lock these components together. Assemble components 1 and 2 so that
the wheel nut socket at the end of component 1 faces
upward when seated on component 2. This will make it
easier to rotate the assembly when operating the
winch mechanism.
1 — Spare Tire Jack Handle
2 — Extension 1
3 — Extension 2
The winch mechanism is designed for use
with the jack-handle only. Use of an air
wrench or other power tools is not recommended and it can damage the winch.
3. Pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle
and raise it upright so the tire's tread is on the
ground.
4. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and
remove it from the center of the wheel. (fig. 168)
Spare Tire Stowage
NOTE: Refer to “Spare Tire Removal” for information
on assembling the winch tools.
1. Place the spare tire near to the winch cable. Hold
the spare upright so that the tire's tread is on the
ground and the valve stem is at the top of the wheel
facing away from the rear of the vehicle.
2. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and
drop it through the center of the wheel. Then place
the spare tire with the cable and retainer underneath the vehicle.
3. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive
nut. Rotate the jack-handle assembly clockwise to
raise the spare tire into the storage area. Continue
to rotate the jack-handle assembly until you hear
the winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be
over tightened. Push against the tire several times to
be sure it is held securely in place.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 168)
Spare Tire Retainer
277
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing
warnings to help prevent personal injury
or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
to be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on
a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be raised
on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
(fig. 169)
(fig. 169)
Jack Warning Label
278
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by
jacking on locations other than those
indicated in the Jacking Instructions for
this vehicle.
(fig. 170)
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and jack-handle from
stowage.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
3. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest
to the flat tire. Center the jack saddle between the
drain flute formations on the sill flange. Turn the jack
screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with
the lift area of the sill flange. (fig. 171) (fig. 172)
(fig. 173) (fig. 174)
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise with the jack handle. Raise the vehicle until the
tire just clears the road surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum
tire lift provides maximum stability.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 170)
(fig. 171)
Jacking Locations
Front Jacking Location
279
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It
could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it.
Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
5. Remove the wheel nuts. For vehicles so equipped,
remove the wheel cover from the wheel by hand.
Do not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel
off the hub.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
(fig. 172)
Front Jack Engaged With Jack Handle
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 173)
(fig. 174)
Rear Jacking Location
280
Rear Jack Engaged With Jack Handle
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle
the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges.
6. Install the spare tire.
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the
valve stem facing outward. The vehicle
could be damaged if the spare tire is
mounted incorrectly.
(fig. 175)
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires — General Information” in
“Technical Specifications” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
use, and operation.
7. Install the wheel nuts with the cone-shaped end of the
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts
fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal injury.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise with the jack handle.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque
Specifications” in this section for proper lug nut
torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
(fig. 175)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
Mounting Spare Tire
281
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
11. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area. Do
not stow the deflated tire in the spare tire
stowage location. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
12. To stow the winch cable and retainer, fit the
assembled jack-handle over the winch drive nut.
Rotate the jack-handle assembly clockwise until
you hear the winch mechanism click three times.
It cannot be over tightened.
13. Stow the jack-handle and jack. Remove the wheel
blocks from the vehicle and release the park brake.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle
off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts
fully until the vehicle has been lowered.Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal injury.
(fig. 176)
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not
use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
14. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Adjust
the tire pressure as required.
ROAD TIRE INSTALLATION
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
282
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels
with wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the
mounting studs which are on each side of the valve
stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
(fig. 176)
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle
off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts
fully until the vehicle has been lowered.Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct
lug nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this
section. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
7. After 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque
wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle
off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts
fully until the vehicle has been lowered.Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. For proper lug
nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this
secton. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
5. After 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque
wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
283
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
TIREFIT KIT (for versions/markets,
where provided)
Small punctures up to 6 mm in the tire tread can be
sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT
can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -20°C.
TIREFIT KIT COMPONENTS AND
OPERATION
(fig. 177)
1. Sealant Bottle
2. Deflation Button
3. Pressure Gauge
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 160 km with a maximum
speed of 88 km/hr.
4. Power Button
TIREFIT STORAGE
The TIREFIT kit is stowed underneath a cover in the
rear storage bin in the cargo area.
7. Air Pump Hose (Black)
5. Mode Select Knob
6. Sealant Hose (Clear)
8. Power Plug
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 177)
284
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
• Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to
this position for air pump operation only. Use
the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting
this mode.
• Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5)
and turn to this position to inject the
TIREFIT Sealant and to inflate the
tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear
hose) (6) when selecting this mode.
• Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once
to turn On the TIREFIT kit. Push and release
the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the
TIREFIT kit.
• Using The Deflation Button
Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the
air pressure in the tire if it becomes overinflated.
TIREFIT Usage Precautions
• Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed on the
bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the
system. Refer to “Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use. After each use, always replace
these components immediately at an authorized
dealer.
• When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean
water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components.
Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
TIREFIT kit.
• You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle
tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in
the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
285
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
avoid injecting sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 6 mm
diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
286
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the
side of the vehicle close to traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when using the TIREFIT kit.
• Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 6 mm or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a
flat tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
• Keep TIREFIT away from open flame or heat
source.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle.Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the
place provided. Failure to follow these warnings
can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin: It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with
plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes
or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if
there is any contact with clothing.
• TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex.In case
of allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician
immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
• Use the gloves provided in the Accessory Storage Compartment (located on the bottom of the
air pump) when operating the TIREFIT kit.
SEALING A TIRE WITH TIREFIT
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and
(7) to reach the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit
flat on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the
deflated tire and running the air pump. Move the
vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this
position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission)
or in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the
ignition.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the
cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto
the valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into
the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the
TIREFIT kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
• After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant
(white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1)
through the Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within
0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT
kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
287
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the
Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Press the
Power Button (4) to turn On the TIREFIT kit.
SAFETY
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the TIREFIT kit.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous use. Call for assistance.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode
and the pump is operating, air will dispense from the
Air Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
288
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as
high as 5 Bar. The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 5 Bar to the actual tire
pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire
immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire
to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label
on the driver-side latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire pressure by looking at the
Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 1.8 Bar
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure
or is at least 1.8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT
kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the
instrument panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from
the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the
end of the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the
vehicle storage location. Quickly proceed to (D)
“Drive Vehicle”.
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug
(8) may get hot after use, so it should be
handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the
end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant
contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s
interior. It can also result in sealant contacting
internalTIREFIT kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 8 km or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 88 km/h.
WARNING!
TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using TIREFIT. Do not
exceed 88 km/h until the tire is repaired or
replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You
Stop to Use TIREFIT” before continuing.
1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Air Mode
position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the
valve stem.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge (3).
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
If tire pressure is less than 1.3 Bar, the tire is too
badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle
further. Call for assistance.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
If the tire pressure is 1.3 bar or higher:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side
door opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
289
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
290
2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at
the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or
tire service center.
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement.”
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the
authorized dealer or service center that the tire has
been sealed using the TIREFIT service kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in
the recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and
dispose of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the
end of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to
its storage area (located on the bottom of the air
pump).
7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
LIGHTS BULBS – Outside
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS – Interior
Bulb Number
Courtesy/Reading Lamps (Incandescent) . . . . . . . 578
Courtesy/Reading Lamps
(Optional LED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
Glove Box Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Optional Door Map
Pocket/Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized
dealer for replacement instructions.
Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H11
High Beam Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HB3/9005
Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PY27W/3757AK
Front Position Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSX24W
Rear Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PS19W
Side Repeater Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WY5W
Center High Mounted Stop
Lamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
Rear Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WY21W
Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W21W
License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
291
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to
change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will
usually accelerate the clearing process.
Where possible, it is advisable to have
bulbs changed at a FIAT Dealership.
Proper operation and orientation of the
external lights are essential for driving safety and
complying with the law.
1. Open the hood.
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
2. Rotate the applicable bulb and connector assembly
¼ turn counterclockwise and remove the assembly
from the headlamp housing. (fig. 178)
292
4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate it ¼ turn clockwise to
lock it in place.
LOW BEAM/HIGH BEAM/FRONT TURN
SIGNAL AND FRONT POSITION LAMP
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner
filter housing and position the Totally Integrated Power
Module (TIPM) aside to replace certain lamps in the left
headlamp housing.
CONTENTS
Do not touch the new bulb with your
fingers. Oil contamination will severely
shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in
contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with
rubbing alcohol.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the harness connector
and then connect the replacement bulb.
(fig. 178)
1 — Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb
2 — Low Beam Headlamp Bulb
3 — Front Position Bulb
4 — High Beam Headlamp Bulb
FRONT FOG LAMP
NOTE: Turn the steering wheel to the right if replacing the left front fog lamp or to the left if replacing the
right front fog lamp to allow for easier access to the
front of the wheel well.
1. Remove the fasteners retaining the front lower wheel
well access panel and remove the access panel.
2. Remove the electrical connector from the fog lamp
housing. (fig. 179)
3. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two side latches and
squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the
back of the front fog lamp housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
the housing.
5. Align the index tabs of the replacement front fog
lamp bulb with the slots in the collar of the bulb
opening on the back of the front fog lamp housing.
Do not touch the new bulb with your
fingers. Oil contamination will severely
shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in
contact with an oily surface, clean the bulb with
rubbing alcohol.
6. Insert bulb into the lamp housing until the index
tabs are engaged in the slots of the collar.
7. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the
lamp housing until both side latches lock firmly into
place.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 179)
Front Fog Lamp Electrical Connector
293
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
REAR FOG LAMP
1. Reach behind the bumper above the bumper reinforcement and press the release tabs on the fog lamp
housing. (fig. 180)
6. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and
install the replacement bulb.
2. Separate the fog lamp housing from the bumper
fascia.
7. Align the index tabs of the replacement rear fog
lamp bulb/socket assembly with the slots in the
collar of the bulb opening on the back of the lamp
housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical harness connector.
(fig. 181)
8. Insert bulb into the lamp housing until the index
tabs are engaged in the slots of the collar.
4. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two side latches and
squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the
back of the lamp housing.
9. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the
lamp housing until both side latches lock firmly into
place.
5. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
the housing.
10. Reinstall the fog lamp housing.
(fig. 180)
(fig. 181)
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
Release Tabs
294
Electrical Connector
SIDE REPEATER LAMP
The side repeater lamps are located in both front
fender panels.
1. Push the side repeater lens to left side to release the
spring tension and then pull it outward.
REAR TURN SIGNAL AND BACKUP LAMP
The taillamps are a two-piece design. The tail/stop/rear
turn signal lamps are located in the rear corner body
panels. The tail and backup lamps are located in the
liftgate.
2. Disconnect the bulb from the harness connector
and then connect the replacement bulb. (fig. 182)
Changing The Rear Turn Signal Lamp
3. Engage the right hook of the side repeater lamp into
the sheet metal (note correct orientation of lettering on lens).
2. Remove the two fasteners from the inboard side of
the taillamp housing. (fig. 183)
1. Open the liftgate.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
4. Rotate the side repeater lamp in place until the left
side engages (you will hear a light click).
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 182)
(fig. 183)
Side Repeater Bulb Removal
Inboard Tail Lamp Housing Fasteners
295
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
3. Carefully insert a trim stick (plastic flat-blade tool)
between the body panel and the outboard side of
the taillamp housing with one hand and grasp the
flange on the inboard side of the taillamp housing
with the other hand. Use the trim stick and hand
pressure together to disengage the taillamp housing
from the vehicle.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
4. Rotate the applicable bulb's electrical connector
¼ turn counterclockwise and remove it from the
taillamp housing.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and
install the replacement bulb.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
taillamp housing and rotate the connector ¼ turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
(fig. 184)
Tail Lamp Housing Retainers
7. Reinstall the taillamp housing and fasteners.
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
296
Changing The Backup Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two fasteners retaining the taillamp
housing to the liftgate from the inboard face of the
liftgate. (fig. 184)
3. Carefully insert a trim stick (plastic flat-blade tool)
between the taillamp housing and the liftgate. Use the
trim stick and hand pressure together to disengage
the taillamp housing from the liftgate. (fig. 185)
(fig. 185)
Tail Gate Lamp
4. Rotate the applicable bulb's electrical connector
¼ turn counterclockwise and remove it from the
housing.
5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and
install the replacement bulb.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
housing and rotate the connector ¼ turn clockwise
to lock it in place.
7. Reinstall the taillamp housing and fasteners.
LICENSE PLATE LAMP
1. Push the small locking tab sticking out of the end of
the lens toward the side of the vehicle and hold it in
that position.
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool between the end of the
lens with the locking tab and the surrounding housing and then pivot the tool to separate the lens from
the housing.
3. Hold the lens with one hand and rotate the bulb's
electrical connector ¼ turn counterclockwise with
the other hand and then separate the bulb and
connector assembly from the lens.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
4. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and
install the replacement bulb.
SAFETY
5. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
lens and rotate the connector ¼ turn clockwise to
lock it in place.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
6. Insert the end of the lens without the locking tab
into the housing on the liftgate and then push the
opposite end of the lens into the housing, making
sure it locks in the housing.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
297
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
298
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always
use an appropriate replacement fuse
with the same amp rating as the original fuse.
Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Failure to use
proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services are
switched off and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
INTERIOR FUSES
The interior fuse panel is located on the passenger side
under the instrument panel.
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
F100
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
F101
10 Amp
Red
F102
20 Amp
Yellow
F103
20 Amp
Yellow
F105
20 Amp
Yellow
F106
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
110V AC Inverter –
For Versions/
Markets, Where
Provided
Interior Lights
Cigar Lighter in
Instrument Panel/
Left Rear Power
Outlet
Power Outlet in
Console Bin/Power
Outlet in Rear of
Console
Heated Seats – For
Versions/Markets,
Where Provided
Rear Power Outlet
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
F107
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
F108
F109
F110
F112
F114
F115
F116
F117
F118
F119
MiniFuse
30 Amp
Pink
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Description
Rear Camera – For
Versions/Markets,
Where Provided
Instrument Panel
Climate Control/
HVAC
Occupant Restraint
Controller
Spare
Rear HVAC Blower/
Motor
Rear Wiper Motor
Rear Defroster
(EBL)
Heated Mirrors
Occupant Restraint
Controller
Steering Column
Control Module
Cavity
F120
F121
F122
F123
F124
F125
F126
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Description
All Wheel Drive –
For Versions/
Markets, Where
Provided
Wireless Ignition
Node
Driver Door Module
Passenger Door
Module
Mirrors
Steering Column
Control Module
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Audio Amplifier
SERVICING
AND CARE
F127
20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow – For
Versions/Markets,
Where Provided
F128
15 Amp
Blue
Radio
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
F129
15 Amp
Blue
Video/DVD – For
Versions/Markets,
Where Provided
CONTENTS
299
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
F130
15 Amp
Blue
F131
10 Amp
Red
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
F132
F133
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Description
Climate Control/
Instrument Panel
Passenger
Assistance/Hands
Free System – For
Versions/Markets,
Where Provided
Tire Pressure
Module
UNDERHOOD FUSES (POWER
DISTRIBUTION CENTER)
The power distribution center is located in the engine
compartment. (fig. 186)
Spare
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 186)
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
300
Cavity
F101
F102
F103
F105
F106
F139
F140
F141
Cartridge
Fuse
60 Amp
Yellow
60 Amp
Yellow
60 Amp
Yellow
60 Amp
Yellow
60 Amp
Yellow
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
F142
40 Amp
Green
F143
40 Amp
Green
MiniFuse
Description
Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
Ignition Run Relay
Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
Run/Accessory
Relays
Climate Control
System Blower
Power Locks
Anti-Lock Brake
System
Glow Plugs – For
Versions/Markets,
Where Provided
Exterior Lights 1
Cavity
F144
F145
F146
F147
F148
F149
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
Description
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
Exterior Lights 2
To Body
Computer – Lamp
Spare
Spare
Radiator Fan Motor
Starter Solenoid
25 Amp
Natural
F150
F151
MiniFuse
30 Amp
Pink
F152
25 Amp
Natural
F153
20 Amp
Yellow
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
Powertrain Control
Modules
Headlamp Washer
Motor – For
Versions/Markets,
Where Provided
Diesel Fuel Heater –
For Versions/
Markets, Where
Provided
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Fuel Pump
CONTENTS
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
301
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
F156
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
302
10 Amp
Red
F157
10 Amp
Red
F158
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
F159
F160
F161
F162
F163
MiniFuse
50 Amp
Red
50 Amp
Red
Description
Brake/Electronic
Stability Control
Module
Transfer Case Module – For Versions/
Markets, Where
Provided
Active Hood Module
– For Versions/
Markets, Where
Provided
Spare
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Green
10 Amp
Red
F164
F165
F166
F167
F168
F169
Interior Lights
F170
MiniFuse
40 Amp
Green
15 Amp
Blue
Horn
Cabin Heater #1/
Vacuum Pump – For
Versions/Markets,
Where Provided
Cabin Heater #2 –
For Versions/
Markets, Where
Provided
F172
F173
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
F174
20 Amp
Yellow
F175
30 Amp
Green
Description
Powertrain Auto
Shutdown
Powertrain
Shutdown
Spare
Powertrain
Shutdown
Air Conditioner
Clutch
Emissions – Partial
Zero Emissions
Vehicle Motor
Emissions – Partial
Zero Emissions
Vehicle Actuators
Spare
Anti Lock Brake
Valves
Siren – For Versions/
Markets, Where
Provided
Spare
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
F176
20 Amp
Yellow
F177
F178
25 Amp
Natural
F179
10 Amp
Red
F181
100
Amp
Blue
F182
50 Amp
Red
F184
30 Amp
Pink
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
Description
Powertrain Control
Modules
All Wheel Drive
Module – For
Versions/Markets,
Where Provided
Sunroof – For
Versions/Markets,
Where Provided
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift
lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Open the center console and remove the shift lever
override access cover (located in the front lower
right corner of the console storage bin). (fig. 187)
Battery Sensor
Electrohydraulic
Steering (EHPS) –
For Versions/
Markets, Where
Provided
Cabin Heater #3 –
For Versions/
Markets, Where
Provided
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Front Wiper Motor
CONTENTS
(fig. 187)
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
303
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar small tool into the
access port, and push and hold the override release
lever forward.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around
the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between
DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or
2nd gear and REVERSE (with manual transmission),
while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least
amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain
the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
304
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
NOTE: Press the "ESC Off" switch, to place the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in
"Partial Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in
“Knowing Your Vehicle” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the "ESC
Off" switch again to restore "ESC On" mode.
• Racing the engine or spinning the
wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to
idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least
one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles.This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 24 km/h, or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
fast may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin
the wheels above 48 km/h while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.
Forces generated by excessive wheel
speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the
axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster
than 48 km/h or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
305
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
TOW EYE
Your vehicle is equipped with a tow eye that can be
used to tow a disabled vehicle. (fig. 188)
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with
tow eyes. Tow straps and chains may
break, causing serious injury.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 188)
Tow Eye
306
Tow eyes are for emergency use only, to
rescue a vehicle stranded off road.Do not
use tow eyes for tow truck hookup or
highway towing.You could damage your vehicle.
Tow straps are recommended when towing the
vehicle; chains may cause vehicle damage.
FRONT TOW EYE USAGE
The front tow eye receptacle is located on the lower
right side of the front fascia.
REAR TOW EYE USAGE
The rear tow eye receptacle is located behind a door,
located on the left rear bumper fascia.
To install the tow eye, remove the rubber plug and
thread the tow eye into the receptacle.
To install the tow eye, open the door using the vehicle
key or a small screwdriver, and thread the tow eye into
the receptacle.
Insert the flat end of the jack handle through the eye
and tighten, refer to “Jacking and Tire Changing” for
further information. The tow hook must be fully seated
to the attaching bracket through the lower front fascia
as shown. If the tow hook is not fully seated to the
attaching bracket, the vehicle should not be towed.
(fig. 189)
Insert the flat end of the jack handle through the eye
and tighten, refer to “Jacking and Tire Changing” for
further information. The tow hook must be fully seated
to the attaching bracket through the lower rear fascia
as shown. If the tow hook is not fully seated to the
attaching bracket, the vehicle should not be towed.
(fig. 190)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 189)
(fig. 190)
Front Tow Eye Installed
Rear Tow Eye Installed
307
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Flat Tow
Wheels OFF
the Ground
NONE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
308
FWD MODELS
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
If tranmission is
operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
AWD MODELS
NOT ALLOWED
• Ignition in ACC or
ON/RUN position
• 40 km/h max speed
Wheel Lift or
Dolly Tow
Flatbed
SERVICING
AND CARE
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• Ignition in ACC or
ON/RUN position
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
FWD MODELS
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
Rear
NOT ALLOWED
Front
ALL
OK
BEST METHOD
• 24 kilometers max
distance
OK
BEST METHOD
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and
other equipment designed for this purpose, following
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety
chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing
device to main structural members of the vehicle, not
to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws
regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters,
etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to "Shift Lever
Override" in this section for instructions on shifting the
automatic transmission out of PARK for towing.
• Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Damage to the fascia will occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may result
from improper towing.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON/RUN
position, not in the LOCK/OFF position.
WITHOUT THE KEY FOB
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the OFF position. Flatbed towing is
the preferred towing method. However, if a flatbed
towing vehicle is not available, wheel lift towing equipment may be used. Rear towing (with the front wheels
on the ground) is not allowed, as transmission damage
will occur. If rear towing is the only alternative, the
front wheels must be placed on a towing dolly. Proper
towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to
the vehicle.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) MODELS
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or power transfer unit
damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
309
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
310
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) MODELS —
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) MODELS —
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
Your vehicle may also be towed in the forward direction, with all four wheels on the ground, the transmission in NEUTRAL, and the ignition in the ACC or
ON/RUN position. If the transmission is not operative,
the vehicle must be towed with the front wheels OFF
the ground (using a flatbed truck, towing dolly, or
wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
engine and/or transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance must not exceed 24 km .
• The towing speed must not exceed 40 km/h.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be towed faster than 40 km/h or
farther than 24 km, it must be towed with the
front wheels OFF the ground (using a flatbed
truck, towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with
the front wheels raised).
Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
SERVICING AND CARE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
NOTE:
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE –
GASOLINE ENGINE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent
maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe
operating conditions, such as dusty areas and very
short trip driving. Inspection and service should also be
done anytime a malfunction is suspected.
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change. Change
your vehicles oil if it has been 12 months since
your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
SAFETY
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it
is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 12,000 km or 12 months, whichever
comes first.
• Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular
wear.
Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the
vehicle.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Thousands Of Kilometers
24
48
72
96
120
144
168
192
Months
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
Change engine oil and replace oil filter (*).
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
•
311
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
Thousands Of Kilometers
24
48
72
96
120
144
168
192
Months
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check condition and wear of front disc brake pads.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check condition and wear of rear disc brake pads.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels
(brakes/hydraulic clutch, windshield washer, battery,
engine coolant, etc.).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check battery charge status and possibly recharge.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
312
Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if
necessary.
Check operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction
indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage compartment,
passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument
panel warning lights, etc.).
Check windshield/rear window wiper blade
position/wear.
Check operation of windscreen washer system and
adjust jets if necessary.
Check cleanliness of hood and tailgate locks and
cleanliness and lubrication of linkages.
Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork,
underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel
system - brakes), rubber elements (boots, sleeves,
bushes, etc.).
Visually inspect the condition of accessory drive belt/s.
•
•
Thousands Of Kilometers
24
48
72
96
120
144
168
192
Months
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
Check exhaust gas emissions.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check engine management system operation (via
diagnostic socket).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter (**).
•
Replace spark plugs (2.4L engine) (***).
•
•
Replace spark plugs (3.6L engine) (***).
•
Change brake fluid (or every 24 months).
Replace rear drive assembly (RDA) fluid (for
versions/markets, where provided).
Replace power transfer unit (PTU) fluid (for
versions/markets, where provided).
(*) The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried out
when indicated by a warning light or message on the
instrument panel, or in any case every 12 months.
(**) Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s)
at 96 thousand km or 48 months if using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
•
•
Replace air filter cartridge.
Replace pollen filter.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
(***) The spark plug change in Km based only monthly
intervals do not apply.
NOTE: Flush and replace the engine coolant
240,000 km or 120 Months.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
313
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
Periodic Checks
Every 1,000 km or before long journeys, check and, if
necessary, restore:
Heavy-Duty Use Of The Car
If the car is used mainly under one of the following
conditions:
• engine coolant;
• towing a trailer or caravan;
• brake fluid;
• dusty roads;
• power steering fluid;
• short, repeated journeys (less than 7-8 km) at subzero outside temperatures;
• windshield washer fluid level;
• power steering fluid;
• tire inflation pressure and condition;
• operation of lighting system (headlights, direction
indicators, hazard warning lights, etc.);
IN AN
EMERGENCY
• operation of windshield washer/wiper system and
positioning/wear of windshield/rear window wiper
blades.
SERVICING
AND CARE
Every 3,000 km, check and top up, if required, the
engine oil level and automatic transmission fluid level
(four-speed automatic only).
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
• engine often idling or driving long distances at low
speeds or long periods of idleness.
You should perform the following inspections more
frequently than shown on the Scheduled Servicing Plan:
• check front disc brake pad conditions and wear;
• check cleanliness of hood and trunk locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage;
• visually inspect conditions of: engine, transmission,
pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes) and
rubber elements (boots - sleeves - bushes - etc.);
• check battery charge and battery fluid level (electrolyte);
• visually inspect condition of the accessory drive belts;
• check and, if necessary, change engine oil and replace
oil filter;
CONTENTS
• check and, if necessary, replace pollen filter;
• check and, if necessary, replace air cleaner.
314
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE —
DIESEL ENGINE
To help you have the best driving experience possible,
the manufacturer has identified the specific vehicle
maintenance service intervals that are required to keep
your vehicle operating properly and safely.
The manufacturer recommends that these maintenance
intervals be performed at your selling dealer. The technicians at your dealership know your vehicle best, and
have access to factory trained information, genuine FIAT
parts, and specially designed electronic and mechanical
tools that can help prevent future costly repairs.
The maintenance intervals shown should be performed
as indicated in this section.
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press
and release the Menu button.
NOTE:
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 24 months.
• Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular
wear.
The vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the
vehicle.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
Thousands Of Kilometers
30
60
90
120
150
180
Months
24
48
72
96
120
144
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
•
•
•
•
•
•
CONTENTS
Change engine oil and oil cartridge (or at
least every 24 months) (*) (**).
Check tire condition/wear and adjust
pressure if required.
315
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
Thousands Of Kilometers
30
60
90
120
150
180
Months
24
48
72
96
120
144
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check lighting system operation
(headlights, direction indicators, hazard
lights, passenger compartment lights,
instrument panel warning lights, etc.).
Check the position/wear of the
windshield/rear window wiper blades.
Check operation of windscreen washer
system and adjust jets if necessary.
Check condition and wear of front disc
brake pads.
Check condition and wear of rear disc
brake pads.
Conditions and visual check: bodywork
exterior, underbody protection, pipes and
hoses (exhaust - fuel system - braking
system), rubber elements (boots - sleeves
- etc.), CV joints, front suspension, tie rod
ends and boot seals, and replace if
necessary.
Check cleanliness of hood latches, as well
as cleanliness and lubrication of linkages.
Check all fluid levels (engine coolant,
brake/hydraulic clutch fluid, windshield
washer fluid, battery fluid, etc.), add if
necessary.
Check exhaust fumes/emissions.
316
Thousands Of Kilometers
30
60
90
120
150
180
Months
24
48
72
96
120
144
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check battery charge status and possibly
recharge.
Check engine control system operation
(via diagnostic socket).
Visually inspect the condition of the
auxiliary drive belt.
•
Replace auxiliary drive belts.
•
Replace the timing belt (***).
Check the handbrake lever stroke and
adjust it, if necessary.
Replace fuel filter (or at least change every
24 months).
Replace air filter cartridge (or at least
change every 24 months).
Change brake fluid (or every 24 months).
Change pollen filter.
Replace rear drive assembly (RDA) fluid
(for versions/markets, where provided).
Replace power transfer unit (PTU) fluid
(for versions/markets, where provided).
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
•
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SAFETY
•
•
Check timing belt conditions.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
•
•
•
•
•
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
317
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
318
Thousands Of Kilometers
30
60
90
120
150
180
Months
24
48
72
96
120
144
Change the automatic transmission fluid
and filter (for versions/markets, where
provided) (#).
•
(*) If the car is used for less than 10,000 km per year, it
is necessary to replace engine oil and cartridge every
12 months.
Periodic Checks
Every 1,000 km or before long journeys, check and, if
necessary, restore:
(**) The actual interval for replacement of engine oil
and cartridge depends by vehicle usage conditions and
is shown through a gauge or a message (if available) on
the dashboard.
• engine coolant;
(***) Regardless of the distance covered, the timing
belt must be changed every 4 years for particularly
demanding use (cold climates, city driving, long periods
of idling) or at least every 5 years.
• windshield washer fluid level;
(#) Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) at 90 thousand km or 72 months if using your
vehicle for any of the following: city driving, short (less
than 7-8 km) and repeated journeys, or frequent trailer
or caravan towing
• operation of lighting system (headlights, direction
indicators, hazard warning lights, etc.);
Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the
vehicle.
• brake fluid;
• power steering fluid;
• power steering fluid;
• tire inflation pressure and condition;
• operation of windshield washer/wiper system and
positioning/wear of windshield/rear window wiper
blades.
Every 3,000 km, check and top up, if required, the
engine oil level and automatic transmission fluid level
(four-speed automatic only).
Heavy-Duty Use Of The Car
If the car is used mainly under one of the following
conditions:
• visually inspect conditions of: engine, transmission,
pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes) and
rubber elements (boots - sleeves - bushes - etc.);
• towing a trailer or caravan;
• check battery charge and battery fluid level (electrolyte);
• dusty roads;
• short, repeated journeys (less than 7-8 km) at subzero outside temperatures;
• engine often idling or driving long distances at low
speeds or long periods of idleness.
• visually inspect condition of the accessory drive
belts;
• check and, if necessary, change engine oil and replace
oil filter;
• check and, if necessary, replace pollen filter;
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
• check front disc brake pad conditions and wear;
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
• check cleanliness of hood and trunk locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage;
IN AN
EMERGENCY
You should perform the following inspections more
frequently than shown on the Scheduled Servicing Plan:
• check and, if necessary, replace air cleaner.
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
319
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
(fig. 191)
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
320
(fig. 191)
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
5 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
6 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
8 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (4–Speed Only)
9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
11 — Engine Oil Dipstick
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
(fig. 192)
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
(fig. 192)
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 — Air Cleaner Filter
6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
8 — Engine Oil Fill
CONTENTS
321
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L DIESEL
(fig. 193)
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
322
(fig. 193)
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the
future.
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when
necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively
impact vehicle performance. Immediately have
potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealership or qualified repair center.
• Car maintenance should be done at a FIAT
Dealership. For routine and minor maintenance
operations you wish to carry out yourself, we do
recommend you have the proper equipment,
genuine FIAT parts and the necessary fluids; do
not however carry out these operations if you
have no experience.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in
these components as the chemicals can damage
your engine, transmission, power steering or air
conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the
NewVehicle LimitedWarranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
323
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
324
ENGINE OIL
Checking Oil Level – Gasoline Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil
level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not
check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat
overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is
cold will give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground
and only when the engine is hot, will improve the
accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level
between the range markings on the dipstick. Either the
range markings consist of a crosshatch zone marked
SAFE or a crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
Adding 1 Quart or 1 Liter of oil when the reading is at
the low end of the range marking will raise the oil level
to the high end of the range marking.
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the
engine will cause oil aeration, which can
lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature.This could damage your
engine.Also, be sure the oil fill cap is replaced and
tightened after adding oil.
Checking Oil Level – Diesel Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil
level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on
the dipstick. Adding 1 Quart or 1 Liter of oil when the
reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading
on these engines.
Car maintenance should be done at a
FIAT Dealership. For routine and minor
maintenance operations you wish to
carry out yourself, we do recommend you have
the proper equipment, genuine FIAT spare parts
and the necessary fluids;do not however carry out
these operations if you have no experience.
Change Engine Oil – Gasoline Engine
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Change Engine Oil – Diesel Engine
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Engine Oil Viscosity – 2.4L And 3.6L Gasoline
Engine
SAE Grade 5W-20 SELENIA K POWER fully synthetic
engine oil that meets FIAT Qualification 9.55535-CR1
API SN, ILSAC GF-5 or equivalent.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Servicing And Care” for further information.
NOTE: SAE Grade 5W-30 SELENIA K POWER fully
synthetic engine oil that meets FIAT Qualification
9.55535-CR1 API SN, ILSAC GF-5 may be used when
SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting Fiat 9.55535-CR1 is not
available.
Engine Oil Viscosity – 2.0L Diesel Engine
SAE Grade 5W-30 SELENIA WR P.E. fully synthetic
engine oil that meets FIAT Qualification 9.55535–S1,
ACEA C2 or equivalent.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Servicing and Care” for further information.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
Change Engine Oil – Diesel Engine
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak
detection dyes, to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
325
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to
the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how
and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded
in your area.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment that is
located behind the left front fender and is accessible
through the wheel well. The wheel and tire assemble
do not need to be removed to access the compartment. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of
protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not
remove the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
You will never have to add water, and periodic maintenance is not required.
To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to
the right and remove the access panel from the inner
fender shield.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do
not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin,
or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on
skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water.
(Continued)
326
(Continued)
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster source
with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not
allow cable clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
hands after handling.
• It is essential when replacing the cables
on the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the
negative cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the battery case. Cable
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and
free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle,disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage as battery damage can result.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This service
should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a
performance test. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor
lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail,
requiring costly repairs.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
327
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product.
However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or
other service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C AIR FILTER
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the
blower is operating or personal injury
may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following steps to replace
the filter:
1. Open the glove box and remove all contents.
2. Push the retaining tab on each side of the glove box
inward while gently pulling the glove box door
outward until both tabs clear the door opening in
the instrument panel. (fig. 194)
Car maintenance should be done at a
FIAT Dealership. For routine and minor
maintenance operations you wish to
carry out yourself, we do recommend you have
the proper equipment, genuine FIAT spare parts
and the necessary fluids;do not however carry out
these operations if you have no experience.
CONTENTS
(fig. 194)
Glove Box Removal
328
3. Pivot the glove box downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the
filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the
cover. (fig. 195)
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the
filter. Failure to install the filter properly
will result in the need to replace it more often.
7. Reinstall the glove box door. Make sure that the
hinges are seated fully as you raise the door. Otherwise, the door latch will not align properly.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease to
assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust
and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the
parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust
and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should
be removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the
hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should
be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice
a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant directly into the lock
cylinder.
(fig. 195)
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
A/C Air Filter Replacement
329
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Car maintenance should be done at a
FIAT Dealership. For routine and minor
maintenance operations you wish to
carry out yourself, we do recommend you have
the proper equipment, genuine FIAT spare parts
and the necessary fluids;do not however carry out
these operations if you have no experience.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass. (fig. 196)
Rear Wiper Removal/Installation
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully
upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always
use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt
or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield or rear window. Make sure that
they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on
to avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out
of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
(fig. 196)
CONTENTS
330
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Pivot Cap
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the
wiper blade holder. (fig. 197)
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The windshield washer and the rear window washer
share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check
the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill
the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few
seconds to flush out the residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets
or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 4 Liters of washer
fluid when the “Washer Fluid Low” message appears in
the EVIC display.
(fig. 197)
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm
4 — Wiper Blade Holder
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite
and burn you.Care must be exercised when filling or
working around the washer solution.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
331
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
332
Car maintenance should be done at a
FIAT Dealership. For routine and minor
maintenance operations you wish to
carry out yourself, we do recommend you have
the proper equipment, genuine FIAT spare parts
and the necessary fluids;do not however carry out
these operations if you have no experience.
INTERVENTION REGENERATION
STRATEGY – 2.0L DIESEL ENGINE
This vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art engine
and exhaust system containing a diesel particulate
filter. The engine and exhaust after-treatment system
work together to meet the Emission standards. The
system manages engine combustion to allow the exhaust system’s catalyst to trap and burn Particulate
Matter (PM) pollutants with no input or interaction on
your part.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in “Knowing Your Vehicle” for further information.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the
vehicle is damaged, have a competent technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could
permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing CO, refer to “SafetyTips/Exhaust
Gas” in “Safety” for further information.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if
you park over materials that can burn.
Such materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do not
park or operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can
burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, safely
bring the vehicle to a complete stop, shut the engine
OFF, and allow the vehicle to cool. Thereafter, obtain
service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
• Do not shut OFF the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing
the vehicle.
COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or
turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
The fan is temperature controlled and can start at
any time the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
under the hood, do not open the hood until the
radiator has had time to cool.Never try to open a
cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is
hot.
Car maintenance should be done at a
FIAT Dealership. For routine and minor
maintenance operations you wish to
carry out yourself, we do recommend you have
the proper equipment, genuine FIAT spare parts
and the necessary fluids;do not however carry out
these operations if you have no experience.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition coil connectors disconnected for prolonged periods.
CONTENTS
333
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
334
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather,
where applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C
condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc.
If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush,And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable
amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable
cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing
to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose
of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
Selection Of Coolant – Gasoline Engine
Use only the manufacturer's recommended coolant.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Technical Specifications” for further information.
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze)
other than specified engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage
and may decrease corrosion protection. If a nonspecified engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, it
should be replaced with the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
• Do not use plain water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the
radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Selection Of Coolant – Diesel Engine
Use only the manufacturer's recommended coolant
(antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.
• Do not use HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) products in the Diesel
Engine.
• Do not use OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
products containing 2-EH (2–ethyl hexanol).
• Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
Adding Coolant – Gasoline Engine
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to
ten years or 240 000 km before replacement. To
prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same coolant throughout
the life of your vehicle.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to
maintain the proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the area
where the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of
the engine coolant (antifreeze) and will require more
frequent coolant changes.
Adding Coolant – Diesel Engine
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same
coolant throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to
maintain the proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the area
where the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of
the engine coolant (antifreeze) and will require more
frequent coolant changes.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
335
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
336
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the
coolant recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN
HOT” on the cooling system pressure
cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine
coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system.To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules
for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child, contact a
physician immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there
is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking
for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise
your service attendant of this. As long as the engine
operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month. When
additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper
level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not
overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant
to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows
no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may
be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also
be protected against freezing.
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop
when the engine cools, the cooling system should be
pressure tested for leaks.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs
may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident. Driving
with your foot resting or riding on the brake
pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage.You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
Car maintenance should be done at a
FIAT Dealership. For routine and minor
maintenance operations you wish to
carry out yourself, we do recommend you have
the proper equipment, genuine FIAT spare parts
and the necessary fluids;do not however carry out
these operations if you have no experience.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
337
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the “Brake Warning Light” indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when
performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the
brake fluid reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads
wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid
to both the brake system and the clutch release system. The two systems are separated in the reservoir,
and a leak in one system will not affect the other
system. The manual transmission clutch release
system should not require fluid replacement during the
life of the vehicle. If the brake fluid reservoir is low and
the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other
problems, it may be a result of a leak in the hydraulic
clutch release system. See your local authorized dealer
for service.
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Technical Specifications” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Technical Specifications” for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage
your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all
times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs
moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling
point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly
during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
sudden brake failure.This could result in a accident.
(Continued)
338
(Continued)
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should
be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components
could be damaged, causing partial or complete
brake failure.This could result in an accident.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life.
Use only the manufacturer’s specified transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”
in “Technical Specifications” for fluid specifications. It is
important to maintain the transmission fluid at the
correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the
approved lubricant should be used.
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift
quality and/or torque converter shudder, and will
require more frequent fluid and filter changes.
Refer to“Fluids,Lubricants,and Genuine Parts”in
"Technical Specifications" for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. The only exception to this policy is the
use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid
using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect
seals.
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such
damage is not covered by the NewVehicle Limited
Warranty.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
339
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
340
Fluid Level Check - Six-Speed Transmission
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore
the transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is
provided. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using a special service dipstick. If you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit
your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with
an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission
damage.
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit
your authorized dealer immediately.
Severe transmission damage may occur.
Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
Car maintenance should be done at a
FIAT Dealership. For routine and minor
maintenance operations you wish to
carry out yourself, we do recommend you have
the proper equipment, genuine FIAT spare parts
and the necessary fluids;do not however carry out
these operations if you have no experience.
Fluid Level Check – Four-Speed Automatic
Use the following procedure to check the transmission
fluid level properly:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least
60 seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest
of this procedure.
3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear
position (allowing time for the transmission to fully
engage in each position), ending with the transmission in PARK.
5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to prevent
dirt from entering the transmission.
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is
hot or cold. Hot fluid is approximately 82° C, which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is driven at least 24 km. Hot fluid cannot be
held comfortably between the fingertips. Cold fluid
is at a temperature of approximately 27° C.
7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert it until seated.
Then, remove the dipstick and note the fluid level
on both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if
there is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the
dipstick. Note that the holes in the dipstick will be
full of fluid if the actual level is at or above the hole.
• If the fluid is hot, the fluid level should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper two holes in the dipstick).
• If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.”
If the fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick
tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill.
After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick
tube, wait at least two minutes for the oil to fully
drain into the transmission before rechecking the
fluid level.
8. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make sure that
the dipstick cap is properly re-seated.
• Using a transmission fluid other than
the manufacturer’s recommended fluid
may cause deterioration in transmission
shift quality and/or torque converter shudder, and
will require more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in "Technical Specifications" for fluid
specifications.
• Dirt and water in the transmission can cause
serious damage. To prevent dirt and water from
entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make sure that the dipstick cap is
re-seated properly.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
341
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
342
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Lubricant Selection
Use only manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Do not add any materials (other than leak detection dyes). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Change the manual transmission fluid at the intervals
shown in the “Maintenance Schedule” in this manual.
REAR DRIVE ASSEMBLY (RDA) –
AWD MODELS ONLY
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage.
If leakage is detected, check the fluid level by removing
the fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between the bottom of the fill hole to 4 mm below the fill
hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU) –
AWD MODELS ONLY
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage.
If leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing
the fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between the bottom of the fill hole to 4 mm below the fill
hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
APPEARANCE CARE AND PROTECTION
FROM CORROSION
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim,
and underbody protection.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap, and
rinse the panels completely with clear water.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
• Use a high quality cleaner wax to protect your paint
finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
SAFETY
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and
painted surfaces.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
Special Care
IN AN
EMERGENCY
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month.
SERVICING
AND CARE
The most common causes are:
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and cargo area be kept
clear and open.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such
repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
CONTENTS
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
343
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
344
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause, which destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as
possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the
responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are
well packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as
soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch
up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel
wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use
oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the
wheels’ protective finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply a mild soap solution to a
clean, damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh,
damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply a Multi-Purpose Cleaner or
equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap
residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products, which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Cleaning Interior Trim
Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth. Do not use harsh cleaners.
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles
of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather
upholstery and should be removed promptly with a
damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with
a soft cloth. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the
lenses.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
345
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning the inside rear window equipped with an
electric defroster. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
instruments that may scratch the elements.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on
the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray
cleaner directly on the mirror.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
346
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
CLEANING THE CUP HOLDERS
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent.
VEHICLE STORAGE
TIRE ROTATION
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than RECOMMENDATIONS
21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your
battery. You may:
• Disconnect the battery negative cable.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run
the air conditioning system at idle for about five
minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This
will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize
the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all
season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help
to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and
contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
NOTE: Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular
wear.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
347
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears stamped on the right front door sill
under the sill moulding and printed on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title. (fig. 198)
(fig. 199)
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
(fig. 198)
(fig. 199)
VIN Location
348
Stamped VIN Location
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can
result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes
can cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems.You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift
to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a
need for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also
increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause
the vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side
door.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
349
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
After inspecting or adjusting the tire
pressure, always reinstall the valve stem
cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt
from entering the valve stem,which could damage
the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has
not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1.6 km after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide
range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary
with temperature changes.
CONTENTS
Tire pressures change by approximately 7 kPa per 7°C
of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when
checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the
winter.
350
Example: If garage temperature = 20°C and the outside
temperature = 0°C then the cold tire inflation pressure
should be increased by 21 kPa, which equals 7 kPa for
every 7°C for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 13 to 40 kPa during
operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build
up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or
conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at
high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure
is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced
vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle
operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or
original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The
added strain on your tires could cause them to
fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 120 km/h.
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other
types of tires on your vehicle will cause
your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability
could cause a collision.Always use radial ply tires
in sets of four. Never combine them with other
types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than 6 mm.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size
and service description (Load Index and Speed Code).
Tire Types
All Season Tires (for versions/markets, where
provided)
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can
be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation
on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of
four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow
or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires,
be aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. For more information, contact a
authorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all
season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall.
Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
351
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
352
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow
tires during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by
a mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size
and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect
the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
120 km/h. For speeds above 120 km/h refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire
inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states
prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires (for versions/markets, where
provided)
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 80 km at
80 km/h after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This
rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat
mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 96 kPa. Once a Run Flat tire
reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run
Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more
information.
Spare Tires (for versions/markets, where
provided)
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of
a spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” in “In an
emergency” for further information.
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an
automatic car wash with a compact, full
size or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel (for versions/markets, where provided)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the
tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this
option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the
recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire (for versions/markets,
where provided)
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since
the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare
tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire
and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares,
do not drive more than 80 km/h.Temporary use
spares have limited tread life.When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary
use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your spare.
Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure
and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare (for versions/markets, where
provided)
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on
the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This
spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not
the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or
repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
353
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
354
Limited-Use Spare (for versions/markets,
where provided)
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use
spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the
same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency
use only. Installation of this limited-use
spare tire affects vehicle handling.With this tire,
do not drive more than the speed listed on the
limit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold
tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in
loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do
not spin your vehicle's wheels above 48 km/h or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In an emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.
Forces generated by excessive wheel
speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire
could explode and injure someone. Do not spin
your vehicle's wheels faster than 48 km/h for
more than 30 seconds continuously when you are
stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires should
be replaced. (fig. 200)
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes 2 mm. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further
information.
• Tire pressure
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
• Driving style
SAFETY
• Distance driven
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the
remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning
can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
(fig. 200)
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
CONTENTS
355
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
356
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure.
The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use
tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the
paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the
Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a
tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating
other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires
and wheels may change suspension dimensions
and performance characteristics, resulting in
changes to steering,handling,and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling
and stress to steering and suspension components.You could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the
tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved
for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Front Tires Only.
• Due to limited clearance, on a 225/65R17 102h tire,
use reduced size snow chains or traction devices
with a maximum projection of 6 mm beyond the tire
profile.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type
(M+S, Snow) between front and rear
axles can cause unpredictable handling.You could
lose control and have a collision.
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device
clearance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only traction
devices in good condition are used.Broken devices
can cause serious damage.Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device
breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about 0.8 km.
• Do not exceed 48 km/h.
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 48 km/h.
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare
tire.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
357
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
358
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE
ENGINE
All engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline with a
minimum Research Octane Number (RON) of 91.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful
to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock
at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service
is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems
such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturer's world wide have issued
and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the
Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel
properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions,
performance, and durability for your vehicle. The
manufacturer recommends the use of gasoline that
meets the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Methanol
(Methyl) is used in a variety of concentrations when
blended with unleaded gasoline. You may find fuels
containing 3% or more methanol along with other
alcohols called cosolvents. Problems that result from
using methanol/gasoline are not the responsibility of
the manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made
from Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
Methanol.
Do not use gasolines containing Methanol. Use of these blends may result in
starting and drivability problems and
may damage critical fuel system components.
Ethanol
The manufacturer recommends that your vehicle be
operated on fuel containing no more than 10% ethanol.
Purchasing your fuel from a reputable supplier may
reduce the risk of exceeding this 10% limit and/or of
receiving fuel with abnormal properties. It should also
be noted that an increase in fuel consumption should
be expected when using ethanol-blended fuels, due to
the lower energy content of ethanol. Problems that
result from using methanol/gasoline or E-85 ethanol
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
Use of fuel with Ethanol content higher
than 10% may result in engine malfunction, starting and operating difficulties,
and materials degradation.These adverse effects
could result in permanent damage to your vehicle.
Clean Air Gasoline
Many gasolines are now being blended to contribute to
cleaner air, especially in those areas where air pollution
levels are high. These new blends provide a cleaner
burning fuel and some are referred to as “reformulated
gasoline.”
The manufacturer supports these efforts toward
cleaner air. You can help by using these blends as they
become available.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your
vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be
indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should
ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his/her gasoline contains MMT.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
359
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
360
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases
is deadly. Follow the precautions below
to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases.They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which
can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area,
such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running for an extended period.
If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short period,
adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance.Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — DIESEL
ENGINE
Use Premium Quality Diesel fuels with a Cetane rating
of 50 or higher, and meeting the EN590 standard are
highly recommended. See your authorized dealer for
further information regarding fuels available in your
area.
FLUID CAPACITIES
Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Front Wheel Drive Models
All Wheel Drive Models
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L Engine
3.6L Engine
2.0L Diesel Engine
Cooling System *
2.4L Engine and Single- or Dual-Zone Climate Control System
2.4L Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System
3.6L Engine and Single- or Dual-Zone Climate Control System
3.6L Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System
2.0L Diesel Engine and Single- or Dual-Zone Climate Control System
2.0L Diesel Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
77.6 Liters
79.8 Liters
SAFETY
4.3 Liters
5.6 Liters
5.2 Liters
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
10.1 Liters
11.0 Liters
12.4 Liters
13.7 Liters
9.1 Liters
9.9 Liters
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
361
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
ENGINE
Component
SAFETY
Engine Coolant*
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine***
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine***
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
362
Engine Oil – 2.0L Diesel Engine***
Fluids and Lubricants Specs (Genuine Parts)
Red protective agent with antifreeze action, based on inhibited monoethyl
glycol with organic formula. Exceeds CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 specifications, FIAT Classification 9.55523 (PARAFLU UP Contractual Technical
Reference N° F101.M01. Cooling circuit usage percentage: 50% water 50%
PARAFLU UP **)
SAE Grade 5W-20 fully synthetic engine oil that meets FIAT Classification
9.55535-CR1, API SN, ILSAC GF-5 (SELENIA K POWER, Contractual
Technical Reference N°F102.F11).
SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to Fiat 9.55535-CR1 (SELENIA K POWER,
Contractual Technical Reference N°F042.F11) may be used when SAE 5W-20
engine oil is not available.
SAE Grade 5W-20 fully synthetic engine oil that meets FIAT Classification
9.55535-CR1, API SN, ILSAC GF-5 (SELENIA K POWER, Contractual
Technical Reference N°F102.F11).
SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to Fiat 9.55535-CR1 (SELENIA K POWER,
Contractual Technical Reference N°F042.F11) may be used when SAE 5W-20
engine oil is not available.
SAE Grade 5W-30 fully synthetic engine oil that meets FIAT Classification
9.55535–S1, ACEA C2 (SELENIA WR P.E. Contractual Technical Reference
N°F510.D07)
Component
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 2.4L And 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 2.0L Diesel Engine
Diesel Fuel Additive – 2.0L Diesel
Engine
Fluids and Lubricants Specs (Genuine Parts)
We recommend you use OEM Original Equipment Spark Plugs (Gap 1.1 mm)
We recommend you use OEM Original Equipment Spark Plugs (Gap 1.1 mm)
Research Octane Number (RON) of 91 or higher
50 Cetane or higher (Less than 15 ppm Sulfur)
Additive for diesel with antifreeze and protective action for diesel engines.
(TUTELA DIESEL ART, Contractual Technical Reference N° F601.L06. To be
mixed with the diesel fuel: 25 cc per 10 litres).
* IMPORTANT: Do not top up or mix with fluids with
different specifications.
** For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture
of 60% PARAFLU UPand 40% demineralized water is
recommended.
*** Lubricants with ACEA C2 performance as a minimum may be used for Diesel engines in an emergency,
where no original products are available. In such event,
the engine may not provide optimal performance. We
recommend having the lubricant replaced as soon as
possible. Using products with specifications lower than
ILSAC GF-5 for gasoline engines or lower than ACEA
C2 for Diesel engines may cause engine damage not
covered by warranty.
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
363
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
364
CHASSIS
Component
Automatic Transmission
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Manual Transmission (for versions/
markets, where provided)
Brake/Clutch Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Windshield/Rear Window Washer
Fluid
Fluids and Lubricants Specs (Genuine Parts)
Totally synthetic lubricant that meets FIAT Classification 9.55550-AV4
(TUTELA TRANSMISSION FORCE4, Contractual Technical Reference
No F108.F11).
Grade SAE 75W synthetic lubricant that meets FIAT Classification
9.55550-MZ6 (TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARFORCE Contractual Technical
Reference N° F002.F10)
Synthetic fluid that meets FIAT Classification 9.55597, FMVSS n° 116, DOT 4,
ISO 4925, SAE J-1704 (TUTELA TOP 4, Contractual Technical Reference
N° F001.A93)
Totally synthetic lubricant that meets FIAT Classification 9.55550-AV4
(TUTELA TRANSMISSION FORCE4, Contractual Technical Reference
N° F108.F11)
Mixture of alcohol, water and surfactants that meets FIAT Classification
9.55522, CUNA NC 956-11 (TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC35, Contractual
Technical Reference N° F201.D02)
ARRANGEMENTS FOR DEALING WITH THE VEHICLE AT THE END OF ITS LIFE
FIAT has been committed for many years to safeguarding the environment through the constant improvement of its
production processes and manufacturing products that are increasingly “eco-compatible”.
To give customers the best possible service in terms of respecting environmental laws and in response to European
Directive 2000/53/EC governing vehicles at the end of their life, FIAT is offering its customers the opportunity of handing
over their vehicle* at the end of its life without incurring any additional costs.
The European Directive sets out that when the vehicle is handed over the last keeper or owner should not incur any
expenses as a result of it having a zero or negative market value.
In all European Union countries, until 1st January 2007, only vehicles registered after 1st July 2002 were collected free of
charge, while since 2007 collection has been free of charge irrespective of the year of registration as long as the vehicle
contains its basic components (in particular, the engine and bodywork) and has no additional waste.
To hand your vehicle over at the end of its life without extra cost, go to one of our Dealerships or FIAT-authorized
collection and scrapping centres.
These centres have been carefully chosen to offer high quality service for the collection, treatment and recycling of unused
vehicles with respect to the environment.
You can find further information on these collection and scrapping centres either from a FIAT or FIAT Commercial Vehicle
Dealership or by calling the freephone number 00800 3428 0000 or by going on the FIAT website.
(*) Vehicle for transporting passengers with a maximum of nine seats and a total permitted weight of 3.5 t
365
366
367
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
368
CONTENTS
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 234
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . .134, 135, 269
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Adding Washer Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216, 222
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Airbag Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221, 224, 227, 264
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218, 220, 222
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . .219, 220, 222
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . . . .326
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85, 328
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 81
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327, 328
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266, 349
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15, 269
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15, 17
All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . .334, 335, 361
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134, 135
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135, 136, 269
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238, 339
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . .106
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Back-Up Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . . .13
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188, 226
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 337
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 337
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134, 135
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .229
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291, 292
Bulbs, Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228, 291
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320, 322, 325
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Cargo Area Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Cargo Load Floor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Cargo Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Rollaway Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Tri-Fold Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Cargo Tie-Downs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Cargo (Vehicle Loading). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . . .183
Conserving Fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334, 336
Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . .334, 335, 361, 362
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78, 227
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
369
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
370
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360, 362
Diesel Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Door Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Door Locks, Automatic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . .27
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . .106
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . .96
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). . . . .19, 159
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229, 320, 322
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320, 321
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334, 362
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125, 226
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324, 361, 362
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 325
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320, 322, 325
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Ethanol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125, 226, 332
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Exterior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85, 328
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 228, 265
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Flooded Engine Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87, 265, 293, 294
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293, 294
Fog Lights, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269, 294
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 58
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358, 360
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360, 362
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358, 362
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Fuel Saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 185
Gas Gauge (Fuel Gauge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12, 15, 152
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
371
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
372
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . . . . .88
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Holder, Coin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Immobilizer (Sentry Key). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Intervention Regeneration Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Jacking Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274, 275
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Jump Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118, 230
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Key, Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Latches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Leveling, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Life of Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228, 291
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86, 228
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221, 224, 227, 264
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . . .140
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87, 265, 293
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Headlight Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86, 292
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 265, 292
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86, 264
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7, 23
Low Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . .264
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Rear Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269, 294
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291, 292
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . .264
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Side Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .145, 266
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 228, 265, 292, 295
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . .264
Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
373
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
374
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Multi-Function Control Lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .264
Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Map/Reading Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Methanol Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 100
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Navigation System (Uconnect® gps) . . . . . . . . . .159, 160
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187, 220, 223
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . .218, 219, 220, 222
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . . .358, 362
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 266
Oil Change Indicator, Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 266
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324, 362
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 325
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325, 361
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Operator Manual (Owner's Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Paint Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Passenger Seat Back Tilt (Easy Entry System) . . . . . . . .57
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .106
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Power Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . .12
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Remote Controls. . . . . . . . . .
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.351
.336
.184
.161
.161
Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 81
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Rear Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Rear Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Rear Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 58
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Reclining Rear Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 58
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls. . . . . . . . . . .161
Repeater Lights, Side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 266
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Reverse Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
375
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
376
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Rotation, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125, 226
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Seat Belt Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187, 188, 226
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .191
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188, 189
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 50
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 58
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Reclining Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 58
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50, 54, 58
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15, 269
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . .334, 335, 362
Sentry Key (Immobilizer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .264
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Side Repeater Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 228, 265, 295
Snow Chains (Tire Chains). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Sound Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Sound Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275, 353, 354
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .161
Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Sun Roof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . .216
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
System, Navigation (Uconnect® gps) . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Time Delay, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228, 349
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Towing Eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 248
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Transaxle
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
377
KNOWING
YOUR
VEHICLE
SAFETY
STARTING
AND
DRIVING
WARNING
LIGHTS
AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SERVICING
AND CARE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
378
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238, 339
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341, 342
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .13
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . .12
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . .12
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Tread Wear Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 265, 295
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Underhood Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . .
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.183
.300
.183
.358
.192
.345
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 347
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description). . . . .264
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Washers, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91, 93, 331
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Wheel and Wheel Trim. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 124
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91, 93
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Wiper, Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Notes
Notes
Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. - Parts & Services - Technical Services - Service Engineering
Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 3 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Italia)
Print n. 530.02.287 - 09/2013 - Edition 1
WHY CHOOSE
GENUINE PARTS
We really know your car because we invented, designed
and built it: we know every single detail. At
Fiat Service authorised workshops you can find
technicians who are trained by us, offering quality and
professionalism for all your service requirements.
Fiat workshops are always close to you for your
servicing operations, repairs and seasonal checks and
our experts will offer practical recommendations for
keeping your car in the best possible condition.
When you use Genuine Parts you keep the reliability,
comfort and performance features of your new car
over time.
Always ask for Genuine Parts and insist on them
being fitted to your car. We recommend them because
we know they are derived from our continued
commitment to research and development and our use
of highly innovative technologies.
For these reasons, you can rely on Genuine Parts
because they are the only ones designed specifically
for your car.
1500080_14_FIAT_Freemont_OM_cover.indd 2
8/27/13 3:02 PM
ENGLISH
The data contained in this publication is intended merely as a guide. FIAT reserves the right to modify the models and
versions described in this booklet at any time for technical and commercial reasons.
If you have any further questions please consult your FIAT dealer.
Printed in recycled paper without chlorine.
1500080_14_FIAT_Freemont_OM_cover.indd 1
F
I
A
O
W
F
T
N
E
R
R
E
H
A
E
N
M
D
B
O
O
O
N
T
K
8/27/13 3:02 PM